UC-NRLF 


il IUIUYIOUI 


O18 144 











































































































AND EL ARB NT arte wy EO. 


re ey 


ἐγ 








Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/historyofgreekal0Osophrich 





‘HISTORY 


OF THE 


GREEK ALPHABET, 


WITH REMARKS ON GREEK 


IRTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 


By E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. 


CAMBRIDGE: 
PUBLISHED BY GEORGE NICHOLS. 


BOSTON: 
B. B. MUSSEY AND COMPANY. 
1848. 





Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1848, by GEorcE NicHoLs, 
in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 


> 
* * . 
ἁ . . 
* . . 
* 


ἧς +e? CAMIRIDGE δ. 


METCALF AND COMPANY, 


PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY, 


PREFACE. 


To pronounce a foreign language correctly is 
nothing less than to pronounce it like a well- 
educated native. 

To pronounce a dead language properly is sim- 
ply to pronounce it according to the usage of the 
most flourishing period of that language. ‘Thus, 
the best system of Greek pronunciation is that 
which prevailed during the period which succes- 
sively produced Homer, Pindar, Auschylus, Herod- 
otus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, ‘Thucyd- 
ides, Xenophon, Plato, Demosthenes, Aristotle, 
Polybius, Dionysius of Halicarnassus, and other 
distinguished authors of their times, — that 15, the 
period which commences with Homer and ends 
about the beginning of the Christian era. But as 
we have no direct knowledge of the pronunciation 


237786 


iv PREFACE. 


of this period, when we desire to know something 
about it, we naturally turn to inquire how the 
modern Greeks pronounce Romaic. words appar- 
ently Greek in their origin. It is obvious, how- 
ever, that the Romaic pronunciation cannot resem- 
ble the ancient more nearly than the language of 
Christépoulos and Solomds resembles that of 
Anacreon and Pindar; although it may be rea- 
sonably assumed that it comes much nearer to 
the classical standard than the modern mode of 
reading Hebrew does to the pronunciation of 
Moses, Solomon, and Isaiah. Now any one criti- 
cally acquainted with the Greek and Romaic will 
readily perceive, that, strictly speaking, they are 
two distinct languages, notwithstanding their great 
similarity. It will be enough to state here, that 
quantity, the very soul of Greek rhythm, does not 
exist in the Romaic. 

In view of the impossibility of reviving the pro- 
nunciation of the classical period, most scholars 
have concluded that the best expedient would be 
for every one to pronounce Greek after the anal- 
ogy of his own vernacular tongue. Since, how- 
ever, in some of the leading modern languages of 


Europe, pronunciation and spelling are not unfre- 


Γ 
} 
i 


~ quently independent of each other, the pronuncia- 


PREFACE. V 


tion of Greek often becomes, to say the least, 
-jrrational and confused. Thus, there is no reason 
why the Englishman, for instance, should pro- 
nounce ez like δὲ in height, rather than like e7 in 
freight, receive, or their. 

It is clear, therefore, that a uniform system of 
Greek pronunciation is needed; and the truth of 
this position very few scholars will question. Such 
ἃ system, independently of its giving individuality 
to the language, —a circumstance by no means to 
_ be overlooked, — will put the Greek on the same 
footing with the Hebrew, which no one has yet 
seriously attempted to read after the analogy of 

any of the modern languages of Europe. 

In the following pages, an attempt is made to 

deduce from the most authentic sources a uniform 
system of Greek pronunciation. 

The chapter on the Alphabet is designed to 

illustrate the progress of Greek orthography from 
the seventh century before Christ down to the 


_ present day. 








CONTENTS. 
PAGE 
Tue ALPHABET  . 3 : : : : : ΠῚ 
Traditions and Fictions concerning the Alphabet . - 1 
History of the Greek Alphabet - : : : ἘΝ τ 
Remarks on Orthography . : : : : ; 52 
PRONUNCIATION. : : : : : : : . 86 
Roman Mode of writing Greek Words : : : 87 
Greek Mode of writing Roman Words . : : ΑΓ ΘΘ 
Romaic or Modern Greek Pronunciation : Ξ : 92 
Probable Ancient Pronunciation ; : : . . 101 
Vowels and Diphthongs Ξ : : Ξ : 101 
Breathings β : : é ε - : . 109 
Consonants . ; ies 2 Ξ : ᾿ zr Tes 
Synizesis . : : : : ee by. 
Syllabication - : : ΓΕ 


Accent. 5 ᾿ 5 : : : : . 118 


~, 


- 


ee yay 
FOI yey 
ABBREVIATIONS Se 
as ——— —— 


A. H. stands for sie Antiquités Helléniques. 
Ahr. Ahrens’s Greek Dialects. 

B. A. —— _ Bekker’s Anecdota. 

C. A. —— Cramer’s Anecdota, Oxford. 

C. I. ——  Boeckh’s Corpus Inscriptionum Graecarum. 
E. E. —— Franz’s Elementa Epigraphices Graecae. 
Tab. Her. or Tabul. Heracl. Tabulae Heracleenses. 
rs. Villoison’s Anecdota. 











The remaining abbreviations present no difficulty. 


+ 





THE ALPHABET. 


TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 


$1. 
EPicenes says that the art of writing was known 
among the Assyrians seven hundred and twenty 
thousand years before his time, from which Pliny 
infers that the use of letters has prevailed from 


eternity. 

Plin. N. H. 7, 56 (57). Literas semper arbitror Assyrias 
τς >... Epigenes apud Babylonios DCCXX. M. annorum 
observationes siderum coctilibus laterculis inscriptas docet, gra- 
vis auctor imprimis, ..... ex quo apparet aeternum literarum 
usum. 


§ 2. 


According to Plato and others, the Egyptians 
maintained that one of their ancient gods, Theuth 
by name, was the inventor of the letters of the 
alphabet. ‘This Theuth corresponds to the Greek 
Hermes, and the Latin Mercurius. Anticlides, how- 
ever, says that the letters of the alphabet were in- 
vented in Egypt by one Menon, who flourished 
fifteen years before Phoroneus, the son of Inachus. 

be 


ἐ 


Q°o.% + PRADITIONS’ AND FICTIONS 


Plat. Phaedr. 134, p. 274 C. “Hxovoa τοίνυν περὶ Ναύκρατιν 
τῆς Αἰγύπτου γενέσθαι τῶν ἐκεῖ παλαιῶν τινα θεῶν, οὗ Kai TO ὄρνεον 
τὸ ἱερὸν ὃ δὴ καλοῦσιν ἴβιν - αὐτωῖ δὲ ὄνομα Trai δαίμονι εἶναι Θεύθ. 
Τοῦτον δὲ πρῶτον ἀριθμόν τε καὶ λογισμὸν εὑρεῖν καὶ γεωμετρίαν καὶ 
ἀστρονομίαν, ἔτι δὲ πεττείας τε καὶ κυβείας καὶ δὴ καὶ γράμματα. . 

Id. Phileb. p. 18 Β. Λόγος ἐν Αἰγύπτωι Θεύθ τινα τοῦτον γε- 
νέσθαι λέγων, ὃς πρῶτος τὰ φωνήεντα ἐν Twi ἀπείρωι κατενόησεν οὐχ EV 
ὄντα ἀλλὰ πλείω, καὶ πάλιν ἕτερα φωνῆς μὲν οὔ, φθόγγου δὲ μετέχοντά 
τινος; ἀριθμὸν δέ τινα τοῦτον εἶναι. Ὑρίτον δὲ εἶδος γραμμάτων διεστή- 
σατο Τὰ νῦν λεγόμενα ἄφωνα ἡμῖν. 

Diodor. 1, 16. Ὑπὸ γὰρ τούτου [τοῦ Ἑρμοῦ] . .. . . τήν τε εὕ- 
ρεσιν τῶν γραμμάτων γενέσθαι. 

Plutarch. Sympos. 9, 8, p.'738 Ε. Ἑρμῆς λέγεται θεῶν ἐν 
Αἰγύπτωι γράμματα πρῶτος εὑρεῖν. 

Β. A. p. 114. τινὲς δέ φασι τοὺς χαρακτῆρας τῶν στοιχείων τοὺς 
παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ὑπὸ Ἑρμοῦ ἐν φοίνικος φύλλωι γεγραμμένους καταπεμφθῆναι 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. : 

Ibid. p. 88. μνασέας δὲ Ἑρμῆν [εὑρηκέναι φησὶ τὰ στοιχεῖα]. Ὁ 

Ibid. p. 784. Ὅσοι τὴν τῶν γραμμάτων εὕρεσιν ... . .. ἢ παρ᾽ 
Αἰγυπτίοις εὑρηκέναι Θεόθεν ws ἑρμηνεύουσι. Here Θεόθεν seems to 
be equivalent to Θεύθ. 

Ibid. p. 783. Αντικλείδης δὲ ὁ AOnvaios Αἰγυπτίοις τὴν εὕρεσιν 
ἀνατίθησι. 

Tacit. Annal. 11,14. [Aegyptii] literarum semet inventores 
perhibent. 

Plin. N. H. 7, 56 (57). Alii apud Aegyptios a Mercurio 
..... repertas volunt...... Anticlides in Aegypto invenisse 
quendam nomine Menon tradit, XV. annis ante Phoroneum anti- 
quissimum Graeciae regem: idque monumentis approbare co- 
natur. 

Hygin. Fab. 277. Alii dicunt Mercurium ex gruum volatu, 
quae cum vyolant literas exprimunt...... Has autem Graecas 
[literas] Mercurius in Aegyptum primus detulisse dicitur. 


CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. a 


§ 3. 


_ Many ancient authors assert that the Phenicians 
or Syrians were the inventors of alphabetic writing. 
Some, however, say that the Phoenicians merely 
modified the Syrian alphabet. It is also said that 
the Pheenicians took their letters from the Hebrews. 
The Egyptians, on the other hand, maintained that 
the Phoenician letters were of Egyptian origin. 


Diodor. 5, 74. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς λέγοντας ὅτι Σύροι μὲν εὑρεταὶ τῶν 
γραμμάτων εἰσὶ, παρὰ δὲ τούτων Φοίνικες μαθόντες τοῖς Ἕλλησι παρα- 
δεδώκασι. ... .. φασὶ τοὺς Φοίνικας οὐκ ἐξ ἀρχῆς εὑρεῖν, ἀλλὰ τοὺς 
τύπους τῶν γραμμάτων μεταθεῖναι μόνον. 

Clem. Alex. Strom. 1, p. 306 D. οἱ δὲ Φοίνικας καὶ Σύρους 
γράμματα ἐπινοῆσαι πρώτους λέγουσιν. 

Athanas. cont. Gent. 18, p. 18D. Τράμματα μὲν γὰρ ἐφεῦρον 
Φοίνικες. 

B. A. ». 776. [Τὰ στοιχεῖα] Φοινίκων εἰσὶν εὑρήματα. 

Ibid. p. 4. Φοινίκων ἐστὶν εὕρεσις τὰ γράμματα. 

Ibid. p. 783. Φοίνικες μὲν εὗρον τὰ στοιχεῖα. : 

Ibid. p. 1169. Πάντα γὰρ κατὰ μίμησιν τῶν “Ἑβραϊκῶν τοῖς Φοί- 
νιξιν εὑρέθη. 

V. A. 2, p. 187. Καὶ γὰρ αὐτὰ τὰ Φοινίκεια τοῖς ὀνόμασιν, ὡς 
καὶ τὰ Ἑ βραϊκὰ, κατὰ μίμησιν τῶν Ἑβραίων τοῖς Φοίνιξιν εὑρέθη. 
The reader will remember here that the Hebrews were by the 
early Greeks regarded as a Syrian tribe; thus, Herodotus 
(2, 104) calls them Σύροι οἱ ἐν ryt Παλαιστίνηι. 

Joseph. Arch. 1,3. Ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 
τὰ εὑρημένα, μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι. προειρηκότος ἀφα- 
νισμὸν Αδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι, τὸν μὲν κατ᾽ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς, τὸν ἕτερον 
δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος. στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι, τὴν μὲν ἐκ 
πλίνθου, τὴν δ᾽ ἑτέραν ἐκ λίθων. ἀμφοτέραις ἐνέγραψαν τὰ εὑρημένα, 


ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα 


— 


4 _ TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


, “ “ > ἃ \ > 4 ~ Ν 
παράσχηι μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα " καὶ πλιν- 


θίνην δ᾽ in αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι. Μένει δ᾽ ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο κατὰ τὴν 


Συριάδα. ‘These antediluvian inscriptions were of course written . 


in the Hebrew or Syriac language. 
Tacit. Annal. 11,14. [Aegyptii] literarum semet inventores 
perhibent ; inde Phoenicas, quia mari praepollebant, intulisse 


eS αι ΡΥ 


Graeciae gloriamque adeptos tanquam repererint quae accepe- — 


rant. 
Plin. N. H. 7, 56 (57). Alii apud Syros repertas volunt. 


§ 4. 


According to the fictions of the Greeks, the 
alphabet was invented by Athena (the Roman Mi- 
nerva), Prometheus, Orpheus, Museus, Cecrops, 
Stsyphus, Phemz, or by Phenice, the daughter of 
Acteon. 

The three Moirai (the Roman Parcae, Fates) in- 
vented ABHTITY. 

ZEschyl. Prom. 469, 470. Kai μὴν ἀριθμὸν, ἔξοχον σοφισμά- 
Tov, Ἐξεῦρον αὐτοῖς, γραμμάτων τε συνθέσεις. ὃ 

Alcidam. Palam. p. ἴδ, ed. Reiske. Τράμματα μέν γε πρῶτος 
Ορφεὺς ἐξήνεγκε παρὰ Μουσῶν μαθών. 

B. A. p. 774. οἱ δὲ ὅτι 6 παιδαγωγὸς τοῦ Αχιλλέως Φοίνιξ 
εὗρεν αὐτά. 

Ibid. p. 181. Προμηθέα λέγουσι τούτων εὑρετὴν, ἄλλοι δὲ Φοίνικα 
τὸν τοῦ Ἀχιλλέως παιδαγωγόν, . .. .. ἄλλοι δὲ τὴν Αθηνᾶν. 

Ibid. p. "782. Φοινίκεια δὲ τὰ γράμματα λέγεται ὥς φησιν ἜΦο- 
pos 6 Κυμαῖος καὶ Ἡρόδοτος ἐπεὶ Φοίνικες εὗρον αὐτά. Ἑὐφρόνιος 
ὅτι μίλτωι τὸ πρότερον ἐγράφετο, ἥ ἐστι χρῶμα Φοινίκεον - Ἐτεωνεὺς 
καὶ Μένανδρος ἐπειδὴ ἐν πετάλοις φοινικοῖς ἐγράφοντο. ... .. Ανδρων 
δὲ καὶ Μενεκράτης ὁ Ολύνθιος ἀπὸ Φοινίκης τῆς Ἀκταίωνος θυγατρός. 

Ibid. p. ἴ88. τινὲς δὲ λέγουσι κατὰ ἱστορίαν ὅτι [τὰ στοιχεῖα 


καλοῦνται φοινίκεια] ἀπὸ Φοινίκης τῆς Ἀκταίωνος θυγατρός " ἄλλοι δὲ 


3 
ὃ CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 5 
db Φοίνικος [τοῦ] Προνάπου καὶ Eipamns...... ἜΝιοι δὲ Μουσαῖον 

εὑρετὴν λέγουσιν. ...... Αἰσχύλος δὲ Ἰρομηθέα φησὶν εὑρηκέναι ἐν τωῖ 


ὁμωνύμωι δράματι. 

Ibid. p. 84. Ὅσοι τὴν τῶν γραμμάτων εὕρεσιν Σισύφωι ἢ Παλα- 
μήδηι ἢ Φοίνικι ἢ Ἱπρομηθεῖ ἐφάπτουσιν. 

Hesych. Φοινίκια; Λυδοὶ καὶ Ἴωνες τὰ γράμματα, ἀπὸ Φοίνικός 


τινος. 
Tacit. Annal. 11,14. Quidam Cecropem Atheniensem..... 


memorant sedecim literarum formas..... reperisse. 
Hygin. Fab. 277. Parcae Clotho, Lachesis, Atropos invene- 


runt literas Graecas septem A BHTTIY. 


§ ὁ). 

Linus, according to some, invented the alphabet. 
Others, however, say that he only brought it from 
Phoenicia to Greece, and formed the first Greek 
alphabet, properly so called. Others, that he 
merely remodelled the letters which Cadmus had 


brought before him. 


Theocr. 24, 104. Τράμματα μὲν τὸν παῖδα γέρων Λίνος ἐδίδαξεν. 

Diodor. 3, 6. Κάδμου κομίσαντος ἐκ Φοινίκης τὰ καλούμενα 
γράμματα, [ Λίνον] πρῶτον εἰς τὴν Ἑλληνικὴν μεταθεῖναι διάλεκτον. 
Κοινηῖ μὲν οὖν τὰ γράμματα φοινίκια κληθῆναι, ..... : ἰδίαι δὲ τῶν Πε- 
λασγῶν πρώτων χρησαμένων τοῖς μετατεθεῖσι xapakriipen, τϊελασγικὰ 
προσαγορευθῆναι. Compare Eustath. ad Il, 2, p. 858. Δῖοι Πε- 
Aagyoi..... os καὶ μετὰ τὸν κατακλυσμὸν σῶσαι τὰ στοιχεῖα μόνους 
Ἑλλήνων. Also, Plin. N. Η. 7, 56 (57). In Latium eas [lite- 
ras] attulerunt Pelasgi. 

Suidas. Λίνος ..... λέγεται δὲ πρῶτος οὗτος ἀπὸ Φοινίκης γράμ- 
ματα εἰς Ἕλληνας ἀγαγεῖν. 

Tacit. Annal. 11. 14. Quidam Cecropem Atheniensem vel 
Linum Thebanum memorant sedecim literarum formas..... 


reperisse. 
1 * 


6 TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


δ 6. 


Cadmus the Phoenician is said by some to have 
invented the letters. According to the most au- 
thentic traditions, however, he only brought them 
from Phoenicia to Greece. 


Herod. 5, 58. Οἱ δὲ Φοίνικες οὗτοι of σὺν Κάδμωι ἀπικόμενοι, 
τῶν ἔσαν οἱ Τεφυραῖοι, ἄλλα τε πολλὰ οἰκήσαντες ταύτην τὴν χώρην 
εἰσήγαγον διδασκάλια ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας, καὶ δὴ καὶ γράμματα, οὐκ ἐόντα 

A - of c 3 A , “ 4 cr stead 4 », 
πρὶν τοῖς Ἕλλησι; ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκέειν, πρῶτα μὲν τοῖσι καὶ ἅπαντες χρέ- 

/ \ ‘ , , a ~ “ ΄ 
ὠνται Φοίνικες - μετὰ δὲ, χρόνου προβαίνοντος ἅμα tht φωνηΐῖ μετέβα- 
λον καὶ τὸν ῥυθμὸν τῶν γραμμάτων. Περιοίκεον δέ σφεας τὰ πολλὰ 
τῶν χῳρίων τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον Ἑλλήνων Ἴωνες, ot παραλαβόντες διδα- 

”~ \ “ , A ’ , ΄ 9 ,ὔ 
χηΐ παρὰ τῶν Φοινίκων τὰ γράμματα, μεταρρυθμίσαντες σφέων ὀλίγα 
> ΄ , ‘ 3 , e ἧς A , a+ 5 
ἐχρέωντο - χρεώμενοι δὲ ἐφάτισαν, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε; εἶσα- 
γαγόντων Φοινίκων ἐς τὴν “Ἑλλάδα φοινικήϊα καλεῖσθαι. 

Diod. 5,74. οὗτοι δ᾽ εἰσὶ of μετὰ Κάδμου πλεύσαντες εἰς τὴν 

’ ἐπ μ 7 
Εὐρώπην - καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὰ γράμματα φοινίκια προσα- 
γορεύειν. ; 

Id. 3,6. Κάδμου κομίσαντος ἐκ Φοινίκης τὰ καλούμενα γράμματα. 

Plutarch. Sympos. 9, 3, p. 138 E. Ta δὲ δὴ πρῶτα καὶ φοι- 
vixera διὰ Κάδμον ὀνομασθέντα τετράκις ἡ τετρὰς γενομένη παρέσχε. 

Lucian. Jud. Vocal. 5. Καὶ ὅ γε πρῶτος ἡμῖν τοὺς νόμους τού- 
τους διατυπώσας. εἴ τε Κάδμος ὁ νησιώτης; κ. τ. X. 

Sext. adv. Gram. 1,2. τίμων ἐν ois ot, ““Τραμματικὴ τῆς 

: μ η ραμματικὴ τῆ 
οὔτις ἀνασκοπὴ οὐδ᾽ ἀνάθρησις Ἀνδρὶ διδασκομένωι φοινικικὰ σήματα 
Κάδμου." 

Clem. Alex. Strom. 1, p. 506.. Κάδμος δὲ Φοίνιξ ἦν 6 τῶν 
γραμμάτων τοῖς Ἕλλησιν εὑρετὴς ὥς φησιν ΓἜφορος. Ὅθεν καὶ φοινι- 
κήϊα τὰ γράμματα “Ἡρόδοτος κεκλῆσθαι γράφει. 

Tren. contr. Heres. 1. 18.4. Ἕλληνες ὁμολογοῦσιν ἀπὸ Κάδμου 

n a \ ΄ ΄ > 4 ΄ a 
πρῶτον ἕξ καὶ δέκα παρειληφέναι, εἶτα μετέπειτα προβαινόντων τῶν 
χρόνων αὐτοὶ ἐξευρηκέναι ποτὲ μὲν τὰ δασέα ποτὲ δὲ τὰ διπλᾶ. 


B. A. p. 14. Κάδμος δὲ ταῦτα διεπόρθμευσεν εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα. 





CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 7] 


Ibid. p. 783. τῶν δὲ στοιχείων εὑρετὴν ἄλλοι τε καὶ Ἔφορος ἐν 
δευτέρωι Κάδμον φασι. Τῆς δὲ Φοινίκων εὑρέσεως πρὸς ἡμᾶς διόσκο- 
pov * γεγενῆσθαι, ὡς καὶ “Hpddoros ἐν ταῖς ἱστορίαις καὶ Ἀριστοτελης 
λέγει - φασὶ γὰρ ὅτι Φοίνικες μὲν εὗρον τὰ στοιχεῖα, Κάδμος δὲ ἤγαγεν 
αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν “Ἑλλάδα. 

Ibid. p. ἼΞ6. Τῶν στοιχείων 6 Κάδμος εὑρετής ἐστιν, ὥς φησιν 
Ἔφορος καὶ Ἀριστοτέλης. ἴἤλλλοι δὲ λέγουσιν ὅτι Φοινίκων εἰσὶν εὗ- 
ρήματα, Κάδμος δὲ ταῦτα διεπόρθμευσεν εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα. 

Hesych. Φοινικίοις, γράμμασι, Σοφοκλῆς Ποιμέσιν, ἐπεὶ δοκεῖ 
Κάδμος αὐτὰ ἐκ Φοινίκης κεκομικέναι. 

Tacit. Annal. 11, 14. Fama est, Cadmum classe Phoeni- 
cum vectum rudibus adhuc Graecorum populis artis ejus acto- 
rem fuisse. 

Plin. N. H. 7,56 (57). Utique in Graeciam attulisse a 
Phoenice Cadmum sedecim numero. 

Victorin. Art. Gram. p. 1944, ed. Putsch. In Graeciam 
certe Cadmum Phoenicem sedecim attulisse constat, ABTAEI 
KAMNOTIPSTY. 

Isidor. Orig. 1,3, 6. Cadmus Agenoris filius Graecas lite- 
ras a Phoenice in Graeciam primus attulit XVI, ABTAEZIK 
AMNOTIPST®. 

Hygin, Fab. 277. Has autem Graecas Mercurius in Aegyp- 
tum primus detulisse dicitur,ex Aegypto Cadmus in Graeciam. 


7. 


It is also stated that Danaus brought the let- 
ters from Phoenicia to Greece some time before 


Cadmus. 

B. A. p. 14. TvOddapos δέ φησι καὶ πρὸ Κάδμου 6 Δαναὸς 
ἐκεῖθεν (ἤτοι ἀπὸ Φοινίκης) αὐτὰ μετεκόμισεν. 

Ibid. p. 783. πυθόδωρος δὲ ὡς ἐν τωῖ Περὶ Στοιχείων * αφέληισ * 
6 Δήλιος ἐν τωῖ Περὶ Χρόνων πρὸ Κάδμου Δαναὸν μετακομίσαι αὐτά 
φησιν. Ἐπιμαρτυροῦσι δὲ τούτοις καὶ οἱ Μιλησιακοὶ συγγραφεῖς 
Ἀναξίμανδρος καὶ Διονύσιος καὶ Ἑκαταῖος, ods καὶ Απολλόδωρος ἐν νεῶν 


, , 
καταλόγωι παρατίθεται. 


8 TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


§ 8. 


The invention of alphabetic writing has been 
ascribed also to Palamedes. Some, however, say 
that he only formed a new alphabet out of the 
Phoenician. Others, that he only added four letters 
to the old alphabet. 


Eurip. Palam. frag. 2. Ta τῆς ye λήθης φάρμακ᾽ ὀρθώσας 
μόνος “Adava καὶ φωνοῦντα, συλλαβάς τε θεὶς Ἐξεῦρον ἀνθρώποισι 
γράμματ᾽ εἰδέναι. 

Gorg. Apol. Palam. vol. 8, p. 118, ed. Reiske. Tages τε 
πολεμικὰς εὑρὼν, μέγιστον εἰς πλεονεκτήματα, νόμους τε γραπτοὺς, 
φύλακάς τε τοῦ δικαίου, γράμματά τε μνήμης ὄργανον. 

Plutarch. Symp. 9, 3, ». ἴ38.Ε. Καὶ τῶν αὖθις cheapebarrigs 
δὲ Παλαμήδης τε πρότερος τέτταρα... . » προσέθηκε. 

Lucian. Jud. Vocal. 5. Kai ὅ γε πρῶτος ἡμῖν τοὺς νόμους τού- 
τους διατυπώσας, εἴτε Κάδμος 6 νησιώτης, εἴτε Ταλαμήδης ὁ Ναυπλίου. 
ΚΠ]. Ἃ.. 

Philostr. Heroic. 10,3. Καὶ 6 Παλαμήδης, “ Ἐγὼ γράμματα 
οὐχ εὗρον," εἶπεν, ““ ἀλλ᾽ ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν εὑρέθην ᾿ πάλαι γὰρ ταῦτα ἐν 
Μουσῶν οἴκωι κείμενα ἐδεῖτο ἀνδρὸς τοιούτου." 

Athanas. contr. Gent. 18, p. 18 D. Τράμματα μὲν γὰρ ἐφεῦρον 
Boies, ..- s+ τῶν δὲ sp sea 4 τὴ» σύνταξιν τ τ τ Παλαμήδης 
ἐφεῦρεν. ᾿ 

Tren. contr. Heres. 1. 15, 4. *Eoxarov δὲ πάντων ἸΤαλαμήδην 
φασὶ τὰ μακρὰ τούτοις προστεθεικέναι. 

Schol. ad Eurip. Orest. 422, Ὃ δὲ Παλαμήδης ἀπελθὼν εἰς 
Τροίαν τὰ μέγιστα ὥνησε τὸν Ἑλληνικὸν στρατὸν, .. -.- πρῶτον μὲν τὰ 
φοινίκια διδάξας. . .. .. Οὗτος 6 Παλαμήδης λέγεται εὑρηκέναι ιζ΄ 
γράμματα μήπω τότε ὄντα, ἀλλὰ Φοινίκων γράμμασιν ἐχρῶντο οἱ ἄνθῥω- 
ποι, ἄλλοι δὲ ἄλλοις. 

B. A. p. 182. Andodtyres .. «τς Παλαμήδης δὲ τῶν δασέων καὶ 


τοῦ Z. 


CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 9 





| Ibid. p.'783. Στησίχορος δὲ ἐν δευτέρωι Ορεστείας τὸν Tadaph- 
᾿ δὴν φησὶν εὑρηκέναι. 
; Ibid. p. 786. Στησίχορος δὲ Tadapydny εὑρετὴν αὐτῶν ποιεῖται, 
οἷ σλραβωνεῖ καὶ Evpuridns. 
| Ibid. p. 784. Ὅσοι τὴν τῶν γραμμάτων εὕρεσιν Σισύφωι ἢ Ta- 
᾿λαμήδηι ἢ Φοίνικι ἢ ἸΠρομηθεῖ ἐφάπτουσιν, κ. τ. 2. 
᾿ς Ibid. ». 1109. οἱ Ἕλληνες οὐ γράμματα εἶχον, ἀλλὰ διὰ Φοινί- 
kav γραμμάτων ἔγραφον τὰ ἑαυτῶν Ἑλληνικά... ... Παλαμήδης δὲ 
ω \ ς , G \ ‘ , 4 Aa 
ὕστερον ἐλθὼν 6 ρήτωρ εὗρε τὰ δεκαὲξ γράμματα ταῦτα A —Y. 

V. A. 2, p. 187. Οὔτε γὰρ γράμματα εἶχον οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἀλλὰ 
διὰ Φοινικείων γραμμάτων ἔγραφον τὰ αὐτῶν Ἑλληνικὰ γράμματα... .... 
Παλαμήδης δ᾽ ὕστερον ἐλθὼν ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ tod” Adda δέκα ἕξ μόνα 
τοῖς Ἕλλησιν εὗρε στοιχεῖα, ABTAEIKAMNOIIPSTY. 

Suidas. Παλαμήδης... ... εὑρετὴς γέγονε τοῦ Ζ στοιχείου 





καὶ τοῦ II καὶ τοῦ ® καὶ τοῦ X. 

Tzetzes ad Il. ». 46. ῳὋ ποιητὴς γὰρ οὐκ ηἴδει τὰ κδ΄ γράμματα" 
ἐπὶ γὰρ τούτου μόνα ἑκκαίδεκα ἦν, ἃ Παλαμήδης 6 Ναυπλίου ἐφεύρηκε. 

Tacit. Annal. 11, 14. Temporibus Trojanis Palamedem 
Argivum memorant sedecim literarum formas..... reperisse. 
_ Plin. Ν. H. 7,56 (57). Quibus [literis] Trojano bello Pala- 
medem adjecisse quatuor hac figura 0 2 ΦΧ. 

Hygin. Fab. 277. Palamedes autem Nauplii filius invenit 
aeque literas undecim. 

Victorin. Art. Gram. p. 1944, ed. Putsch. Eis [literis] 
Trojano bello Palamedem adjecisse quatuor H¥ ΦΧ. 

Isidor. Orig. 1,3,6. His Palamedes Trojano bello tres 
adjecit, HX Ω. 

Servius ad Virgil. Aen. 2, 86. Secundum quosdam ipse 
repperit literas; quae res si forte sit dubia, tamen certum est 
© @X ab hoc inventas esse cum aspiratione. 


§ 9. 


Cadmus of Miletus is also, according to some, the 


10 TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


inventor of the Greek alphabet. Others, however, 
say that he only invented 0 @ X. 


B. A. ». 81. λλλοι δὲ τὸν Μιλήσιον Κάδμον [λέγουσι τούτων — 
εὑρετὴν γενέσθαι]. 

Ibid. p. 1169. Ἕτερος δέ τις Κάδμος ὀνόματι 6 Μιλήσιος προσέ- 
θηκεν αὐτοῖς τὰ τρία δασέα. ΠΟΘ 

V. A. 2, p. 187. προσέθηκε δὲ αὐτοῖς Κάδμος ὁ Μιλήσιος τρία; 
ΘΦΧ. 


§ 10. 


Simonides of Ceos, according to various accounts, 
added ZZ ¥, OSX, EOT, HN, to the old alpha- 
bet. | 

Plutarch. Sympos. 9, 3, p. 738 E. Παλαμήδης τε πρότερος 
τέσσαρα, καὶ Σιμωνίδης ἄλλα τοσαῦτα προσέθηκε. 

Lucian. Jud. Vocal. ὃ. Καὶ Σιμωνίδηι δὲ ἔνιοι προσάπτουσι τὴν 
προμήθειαν ταύτην. “ 

Β. A. p. 780. Ἐφεῦρε δὲ τὰ ὀκτὼ ταῦτα γράμματα [Θ ΦΧ, 
ZEYV, HQ] εἷς τῶν λυρικῶν Σιμωνίδης. . . . .. Σιμωνίδου δὲ τοῦ 
Κείου εὕρεμα τὰ δύο μακρὰ, τὸ H καὶ τὸ Q, καὶ τὰ δύο διπλᾶ, τὸ Ξ' καὶ 
τὸ Ψ. 

Ibid. p. 782. δΔηλοῦντες Σιμωνίδης μὲν ὁ Κεῖος τῶν δύο μακρῶν 
καὶ τοῦ Ξ καὶ τοῦ Ψ. 

Ibid. p. 1169. Σιμωνίδης δὲ 6 ἀπὸ Χίου ἕτερα δύο ἐφεῦρε γράμ- 
ματα τὸ H καὶ τὸ ῶ. 

V. A. 2, p. 181. Μετὰ ταῦτα Σιμωνίδης ὁ Χῖος [read Κεῖος] 
ἐλθὼν προσέθηκε δύο, Ἡ καὶ Q. 

Tacit. Annal. 11, 14. Quidam..... memorant.... - 
Simonidem ceteras reperisse. 

Plin. N. H. 7, 56 (57). Totidem post eum Simonidem 
melicum ZH ¥ Q. 

Hygin. Fab. 277. Simonides literas aeque quatuor, QE Ζ Φ. 

Victorin. Art. Gram. p. 1944, ed. Putsch. Post eum [Pa- | 
lamedem] Simonidem melicum totidem, Y¥ Z 0 ©. 





CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. ΤΙ 


Id. p. 2459. Graeci sequebantur sonum tantummodo litera- 
rum © Φ X priusquam a Simonide invenirentur. 
_ Isidor. Orig. 1, 3,6. Post quem [Palamedem] Simonides 
.melicus tres alias adjecit, ΞΘ ¥. 


§ 11. 


Epicharmus is said to have invented I, ZZ Ψ, 


OG xX. 

B. A. p. 782. δηλοῦντες Σιμωνίδης μὲν ὁ Κεῖος τῶν δύο μακρῶν 
καὶ τοῦ Ξ καὶ τοῦ Ψ, Παλαμήδης δὲ τῶν δασέων καὶ τοῦ Z, ἢ ὥς φασί 
τινες Ἐπίχαρμος ὁ Συρακούσιος. 

Ibid. p. 1109. Ἐπίχαρμος δὲ ὁ Συρακούσιος προσέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 
τὰ τρία διπλᾶ. 

V. A. 2, p. 157. Ἐπίχαρμος δὲ 6 Συρακούσιος, τρία, Z EY. 

Plin. N. H. 7, 56 (57). Aristoteles..... duas ab Epi- 
charmo additas © X, quam a Palamede mavult. 

Hygin. Fab. 277. Epicharmus Siculus literas duas, Π et ¥. 


§ 12. 


According to some authorities, the letters fell 
down from heaven for the benefit of mankind. The 
place where they fell was called Phoenix, near the 
city of Ephesus. Dosiades says that they were 
invented or found in Crete. 

B. A. p. 780, Περὶ τῆς τῶν γραμμάτων εὑρέσεως διαφόρως οἱ 
ἱστορικοὶ ἱστόρησαν ..... ἄλλοι δὲ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐρρῖφθαι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 
πρὸς ὠφελειαν. 

Ibid. p. 83. δΔοσιάδης δὲ ἐν Κρήτηι φησὶν εὑρεθῆναι αὐτά. 

Ibid. p. 784. Ὅσοι τὴν τῶν γραμμάτων εὕρεσιν Σισύφωι ἢ Πα- 
λαμήδηι ἢ Φοίνικι ἢ Προμηθεῖ ἐφάπτουσιν, ἢ ἐν Φοίνικι τόπωι Ἐφέσου 


4 , 
πεπτωκέναι φασίν, κ. τ. Δ. 


2 TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


§ 13. 


Some ingenious Scholiasts proved from Homer 
that the art of writing was known in Greece at 
least as early as the time of Bellerophon, who car- 
ried a letter of introduction from Proetus to the 
king of Lycia. Others, equally ingenious, proved, - 
likewise from Homer, that the heroes of the Iliad 
could neither read nor write. 


a yd : 
Eustath. p. 632. οἱ δέ γε παλαιοὶ, ὁποῖόν τι καὶ οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι 
> , AN OF ς σι x \ ‘ a > 
ἐποίουν, ζωϊδιά τινα ἱερογλυφοῦντες καὶ λοιποὺς δὲ χαρακτῆρας εἰς ση- 
, @ ΄ 3 , “ \ > τ \ προς σα ἂν, 
μασίαν ὧν λέγειν ἐβούλοντο, οὕτω καὶ αὐτοὶ, καθὰ καὶ τῶν τινες ὕστερον 
Σκυθῶν, ἐσήμαινον ἃ ἤθελον εἴδωλά τινα καὶ πολυειδῆ γραμμικὰ ξέσμα- 
3 , > a > Meo \ A “A / 5 “ 
Ta éyypaportes. ..... Κἀντεῦθεν καὶ ὁ ποιητὴς τὴν τοῦ Tpoirov/emurTo- 
λὴν σήματά φησιν, ἤτοι σημάδιά τινα ἐγκεκολαμμένα. πίνακι πτυκτωῖ 
΄ A A > [4 “ Ν ia XA , ? 3 
τωῖ κατὰ τὴν ἀρχαιοτάτην χρῆσιν. ..... Τινὲς μέν τοι φασὶ δύνασθαι τὰ 
μὲν γράμματα ἐνταῦθα σήματα φιλοσοφικώτερον καλεῖσθαι. ((ὑογη- 
5 9 Ξ 5 σ΄ 
pare Timon’s expression, Φοινικικὰ σήματα Κάδμου, above 
quoted. ) 
Schol. Didym. ad Il. 7, 175. Ἐσημήναντο, ἐσημειώσαντο; 
, - “ῳ > , 2) cd Ὶ 
ἐξ οὗ δηλοῖ ὅτι οὐ γράμματα ηἴδεισαν οἱ ἥρωες. 
B. A. p. 84. Δείκνυνται δὲ ταῦτα καὶ πρὸ τῶν Ἰλιακῶν ὄντα, ὡς 
δῆλον ἐκ τῶν Βελλεροφόντου - φησὶ γὰρ ὁ Ποιητὴς, ““ Τράψας ἐν πί- 
νακι πτυκτωῖ θυμοφθόρα πολλά." 
Ibid. p. 85. Φασὶ δέ τινες ὅτι ἕως τῶν Τρωϊκῶν οὐκ ἐγινώσκοντο 
Ω Rie ἜΞΩ eas a nae 9 κα ᾿ \ 
γράμματα" καὶ δῆλον ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ μὴ σωθῆναι ποίημά τι τῶν κατὰ τοὺς 
ε \ , 5 ὦ “ s \ - ς , 
ικοὺς : ι , ενῆσθαι - 
Ομηρικοὺς χρόνους, εἶ καὶ ἱστοροῦσι τινὲς ποιητὰς προγεγενῆσθαι ‘Opn 
ρου Μουσαῖόν τε καὶ Ορφέα καὶ Λίνον, ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως οὐδὲν εἰς τὰ μέτρα 
ταῦτα διασωθῆναι συμβέβηκε πρὸ τῆς μήρου ποιήσεως " ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ 
πρεσβύτερον ἄλλο τῆς Ἰλιάδος καὶ τῆς Οδυσσείας σώζεσθαι ποίημα. 
ἜΝ ye Καὶ οἱ ἥρωες δὲ ἀγράμματοί τινες ἦσαν καὶ σημείοις καὶ συμβὅ- 
λοις πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐν τηῖ κατὰ τὸν βίον ἀναστροφηῖ χρώμενοι ἐδή- 
λουν ἀλλήλοις ἃ ἤθελον. 





CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 13 


§ 14. 


These traditions, fictions, mistakes, and conjec- 
tures show that the antiquity of alphabetical writ- 
ing was considered by the ancients all but unfath- 
omable ; that the Greeks believed that their letters 
were of Phoenician or Egyptian origin ; that the 
use of letters was known among them at least as 
early as the Trojan war; that the early Greeks 
modified the forms of the Phoenician letters ; and 
that the original Greek alphabet was not exactly 
the same as the Ionic, so called, which became 
general about the commencement of the fifth cen- 
tury before Christ, reckoning backwards (B. C. 
403). 


§ 15. 


—~ 


With respect to the number of letters composing 
the earliest Greek alphabet, most of the Alexan- 
drian grammarians maintained that the oldest al- 
phabet consisted of only sixteen letters, A Β ΓΖ E — 
IKAMN—OIIPSTY. Afterwards the aspirates 
© @X were added to it; so that the alphabet be- 
came ABrA4E—OIKAMN—OITPSTT— 
ΦΧ, Finally, the double consonants Z Z ¥, and 
the long vowels H and 2, being added, the Ionic 
alphabet was produced; that 15, 4Br4E— 
ZHOIKAMN—ZOIIPSTT—EX¥N. 


If Pliny is not deceived, Aristotle supposed that 
2 


14 TRADITIONS AND FICTIONS 


the original alphabet consisted of eighteen letters, 
ABTA4AE—ZIKAMN—OTIPSTTG. 


B. A. p. 180. Ἱστέον δὲ ὅτι βαρβάρων μέν εἰσιν εὑρέματα τὰ 
ἑκκαίδεκα γράμματα ταῦτα, ABTAEIKAMNOITIPSTY...... 
Εὕρηνται δὲ οὐχ ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς ἅπαντα - ὕστερον γὰρ ἐπενοήθησαν τὰ δασέα 
kat τὰ Ourda...... Δεῖ δὲ προειδέναι καὶ τοῦτο ὅτι πάλαι οὐκ ἦν τὰ 
εἰκοσιτέσσαρα γράμματα, ἀλλὰ ἑκκαίδεκα - οὐκ ἦν δὲ τὰ τρία τὰ λεγό- 
μενα διπλᾶ Ζ Ξ Ψ, τὰ τρία τὰ λεγόμενα δασέα Θ ΦΧ, τὰ δύο μακρὰ H 
καὶ Q. 

V. A. 2, ». 121. Πάλαι οὐκ ἢν τὰ εἰκοσιτέσσαρα γράμματα ἀλλὰ 
us’. Οὐκ ἦν δὲ τὰ τρία τὰ λεγόμενα διπλᾶ ZEY, οὔτε τὰ τρία δασέα 
Θ ® X, οὔτε τὰ δύο μακρὰ H καὶ Q. 

Plin. N. Η. Ἵ, 56 (57).  Aristoteles X. et VIII. priscas fuisse 
Bye mavult. ‘~ 

Priscian. 1, 5, p. 542, ed. Putsch. Apud antiquissimos 
Graecorum non plus sedecim erant literee, quibus ab illis accep- 
tis Latini antiquitatem servaverunt perpetuam. 


This theory of the grammarians is explained in 
the following manner: when they speak of the 
letters of the alphabet, they assume that the Attic 
and Tonic alphabets were the only true alphabets 
im existence ; and although they recognize the 
existence of the rough breathing (H) and of the 
letters ΖΔέγαμμα, Kora, and Sav, still most of them 
regard the first two as mere breathings, and the last 
two as different forms of Kara and Σέίγμα respec- 
tively. Perceiving now that the Attic alphabet 
consisted of twenty-one letters only, namely A BI 
AEZHOIKAMN — OIPSTTS@X, that E 
and O stood also for H and respectively, that 
= and ¥ were respectively represented by ΧΣ and 


yo 
x Ι χρᾷ 
CONCERNING THE ALPHABET. 15 


ΦΣ, and that H represented the rough breathing, 
they inferred that 2 and ¥ and the vowels H and 
2 were of later date; and as Z was by them re- 
garded as a double consonant, they did not hesitate 
to assume that it was invented at the same time 
with # ¥. Observing further that the most ancient 
Dorians used KH and ΠΗ͂ for X and ᾧ respectively, 
they naturally concluded that X and © were older 
than ZZ ¥, HM, but later than the rest of the 
letters ; and as they imagined that ©, being a rough 
consonant, was invented at the same time with 
X &, they inferred that the original alphabet con- 
tained only sixteen letters. ‘This being admitted, 
nothing was easier for them than to talk about 
Cadmus the Phoenician, Cadmus of Miletus, Pala- 
medes, Simonides, and Epicharmus. 


oO ΄ - 
Β. A. ». 8. Ἐπειδὴ δέ τινες τὴν δασεῖαν ἥτις τυποῦται οὕτως ° 
> 2 a ΄ , “ \ , + τ 
οὐκ ὦὥκνησαν στοιχεῖον λέγειν, φέρε πρῶτον τοὺς λόγους εἴπωμεν, οἷς 
\ 2 , , ‘ a ὧν 3 Ν ΄ , 
τινὲς ἐπερειδόμενοι λέγουσι τὴν δασεῖαν στοιχεῖον εἶναι, καὶ τότε δείξο- 
μεν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι στοιχεῖον. 
Ibid. p. T77. Τὸ γὰρ εὑρισκόμενον παρὰ τοῖς Αἰολεῦσι Δίγαμμα 
> », / » Ν ’ , a 4 > ‘ 
οὐκ ἔστι ypdupa—exer δὲ τύπον τόνδε F --- ὃ προστιθέασιν αὐτοὶ 
ψιλοῦντες πᾶσαν λέξιν. » Σύμβολον οὖν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐστὶν ἐκφωνήσεις 
ἔχον τῆς OI καὶ OY διφϑόγγου. Ὅθεν δείκνυται μὴ ὃν γράμμα μηδὲ 
συγκαταριθμούμενον τοῖς γράμμασιν : οὐ γὰρ ἐν πάσαις ταῖς Ἕλληνι- 
καῖς διαλέκτοις εὑρίσκεται, ὡς τὰ ἄλλα γράμματα, οὔτε ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 
ἄρχεται ἐν τωῖ ἐκφωνεῖσθαι., ὡς τὰ ἄλλα. 
Ἐπειδὴ δέ τινες τὸ παρὰ τοῖς Βοιωτοῖς καὶ Αἰολεῦσι λεγόμενον Δί- 
“ LA r 
yappa, ὃ τυποῦται οὕτως FY, βούλονται τοῖς στοιχείοις Katatdooey, 
ἔλθωμεν καὶ εἴπωμεν τοὺς λόγους δι᾽ ods βούλονται αὐτὸ κατατάσσειν 


“- , A ΄ 
τοῖς στοιχείοις, καὶ τότε δείξομεν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι στοιχεῖον. 


16 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


C) 
16. 05 729 
§ ee € 


Tue original Greek alphabet was the same as 
the Phcenician or Hebrew. ‘This is evident from 
the names, forms, and arrangement of the letters. 
(Here the reader is referred to Gesenius’s Scrip- 
turae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta, and to 
Franz’s Elementa Epigraphices Graecae.) 


Pheenician. Old Greek. 
"Aned A “Adda 
Bnd Β  Bnyrta 
Γίμελ, Il Fone 
Δάλεθ A Aeédra 
"HL proiotypete€ E Ei 
Ovad F Δίγαμμα 
Zaiv Z ZytTa 
"HO pert: te & H *Hra 
T70 QO Θῆτα 
Io I Iara 
Xad K Kara 
Aaped A AapP8sa 
My M Mu 
Novv N.. Ne 
Sapey δ Σίγμα 
Aip O "Ga 
fy hE: 3 


Τσαδή wanting 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 47 


Kod Q Kora 
Ρήχς P Pe 
Xoev 5 sae 
Θαῦ Τ΄. Ταὺ 


The Hebrew names are taken from the Septua- 
gint version of the Lamentations of Jeremiah. 


§ 17. 


The alphabets used in the most ancient Greek 
inscriptions, that is, those which are referred to the 
sixth and seventh centuries before the commence- 
ment of the Christian era, are the following: — 


folic and Doric. Attic. Tonic. 
A A A 
B B B 
r r FE 
A A A 
Bein EB eo E τες 
Zi best “none otal. & oe 
H breathing H breathing 4H vowel 
Θ Θ Θ 
I I F 3 
K K K 
A A A 
M M Μ᾽ 
Ν Ν Ν 
ΚΣ, XS, XX, Xs ET 
O O O 


rs) 
# 


18 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


II Π II 
Q ae nae 

P P P 

S, M, > ΣΝ x 
T T T 

r r γ 

ΠΗ, ᾧ Φ ῷ 
KH, X x Χ 
my, ¥ ΦΣ, SS ψ 
O O Ω 


The olic and Doric alphabet is found in the 
Therean, Melian, Peloponnesian, and in the most 
ancient Boeotic inscriptions; also, in inscriptions 
belonging to Magna Graecia, that is, Sicily and 
Southern Italy; also, on coins. 

The Attic, or rather old onic, alphabet is used 
in Attic inscriptions cut before the archonship of 
Euclides (B. C. 403). It was usually called Ἅττι- 


A / 
Ka γράμματα. 

Demosth. Neaer. p. 1870. Καὶ τοῦτον τὸν νόμον γράψαντες ἐν 

, , -{ 5 “oa ς “- κι ’ \ \ \ 3 
στήληι λιθίνηι ἔστησαν ἐν Tat ἱερωῖ Tov Διονύσου παρὰ τὸν βωμὸν ἐν 

’, \ σ΄ ¢ U + ἈΝ “- sd > > ΄ 

2eAipvas. Καὶ αὕτη ἡ στήλη ἔτι καὶ νῦν ἕστηκεν ἀμυδροῖς γράμμασιν 

Αττικοῖς δηλοῦσα τὰ γεγραμμένα. 

Harpocrat. Αττικοῖς γράμμασι, Δημοσθένης κατὰ Νεαίρας, 
ἀντὶ τοῦ παλαιοῖς" τὴν γὰρ τῶν εἴκοσι τεσσάρων γραμματικὴν ὀψέ | 
ποτε παρὰ τοῖς Ἴωσιν εὑρεθῆναι. 


Hesych. Αττικὰ γράμματα, τὰ ἀρχαῖα, ἐπιχώρια. 

The Jonic, or rather new Jonic, alphabet is found 
in inscriptions belonging to Jonia, in Asia Minor. 
It is the same as that used at the present day, and 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 19 


called the Greek Alphabet. It was adopted by all 
the Greek tribes as early as the middle of the fifth 
century before Christ (B. C. 450). The Athenians, 
however, continued to use, in public inscriptions, 
the Attic alphabet down to the time of. Euclides, 
during whose archonship a law was passed requir- 
ing the employment of the [onic alphabet in public 
mscriptions. We say in public inscriptions, for all 
the peculiar letters of this alphabet are mentioned 
by Euripides, Callias, and Agathon, which shows 
that it was in general use at Athens some time 
before the time of Euclides. It was sometimes 
called ‘H per’ Εὐκλείδην γραμματική. 



















=< Plutarch. Arist. 1. ‘Qs ἐλέγχει τὰ γράμματα τῆς μετ᾽ Εὐκλείδην -᾿ 
ὄντα γραμματικῆς. 

The inscription to which Plutarch here refers is found in 
C. 1. n, 211. ΔΑντιοχὶς ἐνίκα, Ἀριστείδης ἐχορήγει, Ἀρχέστρατος ἐδί- “71. 
δασκε. 
_ Athen. 10, 79. 80. p. 453 et seq. ‘O δὲ Αθηναῖος Καλλίας, 
(ἐζητοῦμεν yap ἔτι πρότερον περὶ αὐτοῦ.) μικρὸν ἔμπροσθεν γενόμενος 
τοῖς χρόνοις Στράττιδος, ἐποίησε τὴν καλουμένην Τ,αμματικὴν Θεωρίαν, 
οὕτω διατάξας. Πρόλογος μὲν αὐτῆς ἐστιν ἐκ τῶν στοιχείων, ὃν 


χρὴ λέγειν ἐκ τῶν στοιχείων διᾳιροῦντα κατὰ τὰς παραγραφὰς, καὶ < 


A 


τὴν τελευτὴν καταστροφικῶς ποιουμένους εἰς τ᾽ “ “Alda Βῆτα Τάμμα “>, 
Δέλτα Ἦτα Θῆτα, θεοῦ yap ἘΠγε- Ιῶτα Κάππα Λάμβδα Md Νῦ Ξὶ 
τὸ Οὐ πὶ Ρῶ Σίγμα Ταῦ Ὗ παρὸν Bi Xi τε τωῖ Vi εἰς τὸ Ὦ.᾽ ‘O 
χορὸς δὲ γυναικῶν ἐκ τῶν σὺν δύο πεποιημένος αὐτωϊ ἐστιν ἔμμετρος 
ἅμα καὶ μεμελοποιημένος τόνδε τὸν τρόπον " ““ Byra” Ada BA, Βῆτα 

Ei BE, Βῆτα H BH, Βῆτα Ιῶτα BI, Βῆτα Οὗ BO, ΒῆταὟ BY, Βῆτα 

Ὦ BQ.” 

Δεδήλωκε δὲ καὶ διὰ ἰαμβείων γράμμα πρῶτος οὗτος, ἀκολαστότερον ex 


‘ \ \ ΄ , \ \ , ~ 
Miuev κατὰ τὴν διάνοιαν, πεφρασμένον δὲ τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον " 


20 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 






Kio yap, ὦ γυναῖκες - ἀλλ᾽ αἰδοῖ, φίλαι, x 2- ~ Ghuidt 
Ἐν γράμμασι σφωῖν τοὔνομ᾽ ἐξερῶ βρέφους. Zeke ΓᾺΡ 
Ορθὴ μακρὰ γραμμή στιν " ἐκ ταύτης μέσης 


efter frat. Μικρὰ παρεστῶσ᾽ ἑκατέρωθεν ὑπτία. Ψ 
77 te 3 
"Emevta κύκλος, πόδας ἔχων βραχεῖς δύο. © 


‘[[The considerate reader can easily imagine the rest.] 

Εὐριπίδης δὲ ἐν tat Θησεῖ τὴν ἐγγράμματον ἔοικε ποιῆσαι pow. 

-iémax Βοτὴρ δ᾽ ἔστιν ἀγράμματος αὐτόθι δηλῶν τοὔνομα τοῦ Θησέως ἐπιγε- 
γραμμένον οὕτως " 


Ζ + me eg a 
ΞΖ caver Ἐγὼ πέφυκα γραμμάτων μὲν οὐκ ἴδρις, ὠς, 


Lorewd. Μορφὰς δὲ λέξω καὶ σαφῆ τεκμήρια » protpdles 


Κύκλος Tis ὡς τόρνοισιν ἐκμετρούμενος * tommpadd . 


Aezew, Οὗτος δ᾽ ἔχει σημεῖον ev μέσωι σαφές. Θ 
| To δεύτερον δὲ πρῶτα μὲν γραμμαὶ δύο, 
Ave fed. Ταύτας διείργει δ᾽ ἐν μέσαις ἄλλη μία. Η 


ae 
Τρίτον δὲ βόστρυχός τις ὡς εἱλιγμένος. 2 ΔῸΣ 
\ > > ΄ > ‘ > > A , 
Τὸ δ᾽ αὖ τέταρτον ἦν μὲν εἰς ὀρθὴν pia 
στίχας, Λοξαὶ δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῆς τρεῖς κατεστηριγμέναι ὥζξέεξέ cA. 
Εἰσίν. Τὸ πέμπτον δ᾽ οὐκ ἐν εὐμαρεῖ φράσαι" vr 
Ν , > 3 , ’, 
Τραμμαὶ γάρ εἰσιν ἐκ διεστώτων δύο, 
/ 
Αὗται δὲ συντρέχουσιν eis μίαν βάσιν. fade ¥ 
2 = es 
Kod, Τὸ λοίσθιον δὲ rai τρίτωι προσεμφερές. »«.2..Σ. 2 «{, 
Τὸ δ᾽ αὐτὸ πεποίηκε καὶ Αγάθων ὁ τραγωιδοποιὸς ἐν Tat Τηλέφωι " 
> , / > Aa) ὃ λ ” A A 7 > A 2 
ἀγράμματος γάρ τις κἀνταῦθα δηλοῖ τὴν τοῦ Θησέως ἐπιγραφὴν οὕτως - 
Γραφῆς 6 πρῶτος ἦν μεσόμφαλος κύκλος -«“-Φ.«ς. 
r 
pod]. Ορθοί τε κανόνες ἐζυγωμένοι δύο, 
Σκυθικωῖ τε τόξωι τὸ τρίτον ἦν προσεμῴφερές <2 
4 , ’ > , 
Ἔπειτα τριόδους πλάγιος ἢν προσκείμενος 
> 
Eq’ ἑνός τε κανόνος ἦσαν ἐζυγωμένοι δύο. 
σ “ 
Οπερ δὲ τρίτον ἢν καὶ τελευταῖον πάλιν. 
A , ‘ “- 
Καὶ Θεοδέκτης δὲ ὁ Φασηλίτης ἄγροικόν τινα παράγει, καὶ τοῦτον τὸ 
τοῦ Θησέως ὄνομα διασημαίνοντα " ¢ ali “τ. 
- ες > & 
Γραφῆς 6 πρῶτος ἢν μαλακόφθαλμος κύκλος 
»” 
Επειτα δισσοὶ κανόνες ἐσόμετροι πάνυ, 


; An , ἃς 
Hovkevve~ Τούτους δὲ πλάγιος διὰ μέσου συνδεῖ κανών + γ..2, 


7 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 21 


, Τρίτον δ᾽ ἕλικτωϊ βοστρύχωι προσεμφερές. 2“: re 
ΟΡ ΖΚ Ἔπειτα τριόδους πλάγιος ὡς ἐφαίνετο. 
Πέμπται δ᾽ ἄνωθεν ἰσόμετροι ράβδοι δύο. “7. “.4:: 
Αὗται δὲ συντείνουσιν εἰς βάσιν μίαν. 
Ἕκτον δ᾽ ὅπερ καὶ πρόσθεν εἶφ᾽ ὁ βόστρυχος. cece. 
B. A. p. 788. Ἐπιθανὸν δὲ ard τόπον εὑρετὰς γεγενῆσθαι. Διὸ 
καὶ ἄλλοι παρ᾽ ἄλλοις εἰσὶ χαρακτῆρες τῶν στοιχείων. Οἷς δὲ νῦν 
χρώμεθα εἰσὶν Τωνικοὶ, εἰσενέγκαντος Ἀρχίνου παρὰ Θηβαίοις [read 
᾿Αθηναίοις] ψήφισμα τοὺς γραμματιστὰς, ἤγουν τοὺς διδασκάλους, παι- 
δεύειν τὴν Ἰωνικὴν γραμματικὴν, ἤγουν τὰ γράμματα. 
Schol. ad Eurip. Phoen. 682. Ἐπὶ ἄρχοντος γὰρ Αθήνησιν 
Εὐκλείδου, μήπω τῶν μακρῶν εὑρημένων, τοῖς βραχέσιν ἀντὶ μακρῶν 
ἐχρῶντο, τωῖ 1 [read E] ἀντὶ τοῦ H, καὶ τωῖ O ἀντὶ τοῦ Q. 


Schol. Venet. ad Il. 7, 185, p. 182. Οὐχ οἱ αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἦσαν 


παρὰ πᾶσι τοῖς Ἕλλησι χαρακτῆρες " διάφορα δὲ καὶ τὰ τῶν στοιχείων ~ 


ὀνόματα. Καλλίστρατος δὲ ὁ Σάμιος ἐπὶ τῶν Πελοποννησιακῶν ταύτην 

’ A \ ‘ 4 ’ a * 
μετήνεγκε τὴν γραμματικὴν, Kat παρέδωκεν Αθηναίοις, ὥς φησιν “Edo- 
ρος. 

Hesych. Sapiov ὁ δῆμος. ..... Ἑλλήνων Σάμιοι πολυγράμ-: 
ματοι ἐγένοντο πρῶτοι καὶ χρησάμενοι καὶ διδόντες εἰς τοὺς ἄλλους 
σ A A A , Y ov , a ζ΄ ᾿ 
EAAnvas τὴν διὰ τῶν τεσσάρων καὶ εἴκοσι στοιχείων σιν. «Ζφεε: 

7 7 5 ΕΣ XP) 

Phot. Lex. Σαμίων 6 δῆμος. ..... παρὰ Σαμίοις πρώτοις 
τὰ κδ΄ γράμματα ὑπὸ Καλλιστράτου, ὡς "Ανδρων ἐν Τρίποδι . τοὺς δὲ 
᾿Αθηναίους ἔπεισε χρῆσθαι τοῖς τῶν Ἰώνων γράμμασιν. Οἱ δὲ Αθηναῖοι 


ἐπὶ ἄρχοντος Ἐὐκλείδου. = 


§ 18.477 
In the Molic, Doric, and Attic alphabets, the 


character E represents the vowels ε, ἡ, or the diph- 
thong «; in the Ionic alphabet, it stands for ε or εἰ; 
as, C. I. n. 33. 2. 10. 76. AQDENEOEN, Αθήνηθεν, 
TEI, ri, ΠΡΑΘΕΙ, πραθηῖ, KAETOS, Κλεῖτος, EMI, 
eit, IIPYTANES, πρυτάνεις. Even in inscriptions | 


& : 


fa 


x 


22 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 





cut after the time of Euclides, E is sometimes used — 
for , especially in the formulas, C. 1. n. 124. 84. 
TEI BOYAEL, τηΐ Bovanit, ATAOEI TYXEI, Ayabyt 
τύχηι, EN ΣΤΗΛΕΙ AIOINEL, ev στήλην λιθίνηι. 

It is observed further, that when the I in the 
diphthong εἰ is a radical or essential letter, or when 
εἰ arises from εἴ, this diphthong was always repre- 
sented by EI; in all other cases generally by E 
alone, in all the alphabets; as, C. 1. n. 11. 16. 18. 
#62 160: λατρειόμενον, Δεινομένεος, Οφελλοκλείδας, Εὐ- 
πείθης, γραμματεῖα, πόλει, κείμενον. Exceptions to 
this rule are, C. J. n. 76. εἶπε, root {Π1Π-....ψὅτὐχτ6. 160. 
EE and E4EI. 

In inscriptions belonging to the Alexandrian and — 
subsequent periods, « is generally represented in | 
the usual way EI. 


Galen. Comment. ITI. in Hippocr. V1. Epidem. text. XL. 
vol. 9, p. 470, ed. Charter. Τραφόντων τῶν παλαιῶν τόν τε τοῦ H 
δίφθογγον καὶ τὸν τοῦ E δ ἑνὸς χαρακτῆρος. ὃς νῦν μόνος σημαίνει, 
τὸν ἕτερον φθόγγον τὸν H [read E]. 

Athen. 11, 30, p. 467. Παραπλησίως δὲ καὶ τὸ ἘΠ γράφουσιν 
ὅταν καὶ καθ᾽ αὑτὸ μόνον ἐκφωνῆται καὶ ὅταν συνεζευγμένου τοῦ Iara. 

B. A, p. 80. Ὅταν οὖν ἤθελον γράψαι ἔχουσαν ἐκφώνησιν TOU As 
᾿ +H λέξιν, ἔγραφον τὸ E, καὶ ἐπάνω τοῦ E τὸ σημεῖον τῆς μακρᾶς: 4 
This orthography, that is, € for 7, is found in no inscription. 

The character H, in the Aolic, Doric, and Attic 
alphabets, has the power of the Roman H, that is, © 
of the rough breathing ; in the Ionic alphabet it 
always represents long E; as, C. 1. n. 13. 1637. 
1642. 147. 39. HIAPOS, iapds, HATEXANAPOS, 


; 


‘Aynoavipos, HIIIAPXIA, Ἱππαρχία, HEAAENO- 
TAMIALS, ἑλληνοταμίαις ; EPMHXIANAZ, Ἕρμη- 
᾿σιάναξ. 

The change of the breathing H into a vowel must 
have been gradual, for in some inscriptions it is 
both a breathing and a vowel; as, E. E. n. 1—20. 
Προκλῆς, Ορθοκλῆς, Marngo..... C0: Lin. 629 HEA 
AIKH®S, ᾿Ελίκης. 

In the Elean inscription, the oldest Aolic inscrip- 
tion of which we have any knowledge, H is not 
used at all. 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 23 


Athen. 9, 57, p. 398. Οἶμαι δὲ καὶ διὰ τοῦ H στοιχείου τυπώ- © 


4 κι \ ~ , . ΄ ‘ , 72 
σασθαι τοὺς παλαιοὺς τὴν δασεῖαν. Διόπερ καὶ Ῥωμαῖοι πρὸ πάντων + 


τῶν δασυνομένων ὀνομάτων τὸ H προσγράφουσι. 
B. A. ». 80. [Ἦν δὲ] τὸ παλαιὸν σύμβολον τῆς δασείας τὸ 

map ἡμῖν Ἡ. 
β Priscian. 1, 8, p. 560, ed. Putsch. H literam non esse 
ostendimus, sed notam aspirationis, quam Graecorum antiquis- 
simi similiter ut Latini in versum scribebant, nunc autem divi- 
'serunt, et dextra ejus parte supra literam ponentes, psilen 
notam habent,..... sinistram autem contrariae illi aspirationis 
 dasiam. 


The lonians felt the need of a character that 
should represent the sound of long E more than the 
‘other Greek tribes, because in their dialect long E 
115 very common; and the fact that they gave to H 
‘the sound of long E shows that they were fully 
aware of the distinction between the Phcenician He 
-and Hheth, the prototypes of E and H. 

After H was converted into a vowel, the charac- 







Z A: oo, Ne SEN to > ΄ , 5, ΄, , 
ΠΣ Ἢ τὸ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔξω ἀπεστραμμένον τίθεται ἐπάνω φωνήεντος δασυνομένοῦυ 


24 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 





















ter Ε΄. resembling the first half of H, was employed 
to denote the rough breathing. This character is | 
found in the Heraclean Tables, on Heraclean and 
Tarentine coins, and in an Ionic inscription. In 
inscriptions and on coins, it is always written as a 
regular letter, that is, before the vowel. In manu- 
scripts, it is written over the vowel. (Eckhel, 
D. N. 1, pp. 148. 153; C. Ln. 2919.) 
The character 4, resembling the second half of 
H, was employed to denote the smooth breathing 
It is found only in manuscripts, and is placed over 
the vowel. | 
In process of time, the former of these two char- 
acters became x , and the latter 4, which being fur | 
ther modified became ‘ and ’, all of which are found 
in manuscripts. | 


iD. A. p. 693. Τὸ σημεῖον τῆς Saceias, ἤτοι τὸ διχοτόμημα τοῦ 


τα Ὁ τὸ δὲ ἕτερον τοῦ αὐτοῦ στοιχείου διχοτόμημα τὸ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔσω 
ἐστραμμένον, ἐπάνω φωνήεντος Ψψιλουμένου. 

Ibid. p. 1132. τὸ δὲ Η [κοπτόμενον ποιεῖ] δασεῖαν καὶ ψιλήν. rg 

Ibid. p. 730. Διότι [ὅτε] ἐφευρέθη τὰ ὀκτὼ γράμματα [Θ ᾧ 
ΖΞ Ψ, Ἡ Ω]. ὧν ἕν ἐστι καὶ τὸ H, ἡ τότε δασεῖα ἐτμήθη εἰς δύο κατὰ 
κάθετον" καὶ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον αὐτῆς μέρος τῆς δασείας ἐστὶ τὸ σημεῖον, } 
τὸ δὲ δεύτερον τῆς ψιλῆς. 

V. 4. 2, p. 107. Ἡ δὲ δασεῖα καὶ ἡ ψιλὴ ἀπὸ τοῦ H [rm 
γένεσιν ἔχουσιν]. 

Ibid. 2, p. 108. Τὸ δὲ Ζῆτα καὶ αὐτὸ ὁμοίως διαιρούμενον εἰς bv 
ποιεῖ ψιλὴν καὶ δασεῖαν. This description applies to 1, 4, unlessi} > 
we read *Hra for Ζῆτα. 

Ibid. 2, p. 121. Διὸ ὅτε εὑρέθη τὰ ὀκτὼ γράμματα, ἡ τότε δασεῖα 


τς 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. a5 

















᾿ δασείας ἐστὶ τὸ σημεῖον, τὸ δὲ δεύτερον 4, τῆς ψιλῆς. 
See also Priscian. 1, 8, p. 560, above quoted. 


§ 19. 


In the Holic, Doric, and Attic alphabets, O rep- 

resents the vowels o, », or the diphthong ov; in 
the Ionic alphabet, it stands for o, or ov; as, C. I. ἡ. 
76, AIIOPAINONTON, ἀποφαινόντων, TOI AEMOI, 
‘toi δήμωι, AIAXEPIZOSXIN, διαχειρίζουσιν. 
In the pronoun οὗτος and the adverb ov, the diph- 
‘thong ov is commonly represented by OY even in 
‘the most ancient inscriptions ; as, C. J. n. 142. 160. 
158 B. ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟ, τούτουύ, HOYTOI, οὗτοι, ΟΥ̓Κ or 
OK, οὐκ, OTAE, οὐδέ. Also in the words, C J. ῃ. 
148. 147. νουμηνίαι, Σ᾽ πουδίαι ; A. H.n. 6. Σπουδίδου. 
In inscriptions belonging to the Alexandrian and 
subsequent periods, it is generally represented in 
the usual way, OY. 


Galen. Comm. ILI. in Hipp. VI. Epid. text. XL., vol. 9, 


ἀμφοτέρων οἱ φθόγγοι Ou’ ἑνὸς χαρακτῆρος ἐγράφοντο. 

Athen. 11, 30, p. 467. Πάντες οἱ ἀρχαῖοι τὸ Οὗ ἀπεχρῶντο, οὐ 
ὄνον ἐφ᾽ ἧς νῦν τάττεται δυνάμεως, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτε τὴν δίφθογγον δια- 
σημαίνει διὰ τοῦ OU μόνου γράφουσι. 

B. A. p. 780. “Ὅταν δὲ τὴν ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ Q, ἔγραφον τὸ Ο, 
αἱ ἐπάνω τοῦ O, ὡς προείρηται, τὸ σημεῖον τῆς μακρᾶς. This or- 
thography, that is, 6 for , is found in no inscription: 

Suidas. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον...... Μεταπεμπομένου δὲ 


γοῦ Διονυσίου αὐτὸν καὶ ἀξιοῦντος διὰ γραμμάτων ἐλθεῖν, Φιλόξενος 


3 


| <2 , 5 , Η͂ , 4 A 4 - an , am 
ἐτμήθη εἰς δύο κατὰ κάθετον, Kal τὸ μὲν πρῶτον αὐτῆς μέρος | τῆς 2% 


» ~ 
p- 470. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Ὡ καὶ Ο ποιητέον, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τούτων. 


ἀντιγράφειν μὲν οὐκ ἔγνω" λαβὼν δὲ βιβλίον τὸ OF στοιχεῖον ἔγραψε" 


“μόνον πολλάκις ἐν αὐτωῖ, διὰ τούτου δηλώσας ὅτι THY παράκλησιν διω- 


“προστιθέντες τὸ 1, ἵνα τηῖ διὰ διφθόγγου ἐκτάσει δύνωνται περισπᾶ 


26 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET, 

















θεῖται. ‘That is, by the letter 0, pronounced oY, Philoxenus 
meant οὔ, no, I will not come. 


EE for H, and OO for Q, are found only in spu- 
rious wmscriptions, chiefly in those of Fourmont, 
who, being misled by Lascaris and other modern 
grammarians, imagined that H and 2 were mere 
abbreviations for EE and OO, and accordingly em- 
ployed this orthography even in such inscriptions as 
are apparently genuine; as, C. 1. n. 1338. 972. 
ξυρὸν «το ἢ Μεγαλοπολεύτοον, τοον αλλοον, ATroX- 


λοονι, Κιμοονος. ᾿ 
έ RE “ὩΣ A 


§ 20. 


The vowels E, 7, O, 2 had no names; in pro- 
nunciation, the first three were merely lengthened 
into Ei, Ὗ, and Οὖ, after the analogy of the mono- 
syllables Mi, Nv, Bt, It, Po, Ταῦ, Di, Xt, Viz sm 
was pronounced simply °2. If Eustathius is not 
greatly deceived, T was, by the Molians, called "yp. 
(Eustath. ad Il. 20, 1.) 


Plat. Cratyl. p. 393 D. Τῶν στοιχείων οἶσθα ὅτι ὀνόματα λέγο- 


μεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ αὐτὰ τὰ στοιχεῖα, πλὴν τεττάρων, τοῦ E καὶ τοῦ Y κα 
τοῦ O καὶ τοῦ Q. 


Eustath. ad ΠΤ. 5, ». 507. Τὸ Ε στοιχεῖον ἘΠ ἔλεγον οἱ παλαιοὶ 





καὶ αὐτὸ καθὰ καὶ τὰ ἄλλα στοιχεῖα. Τοιοῦτον δὲ ποιοῦσι καὶ ἐπὶ TO 
Ο μικροῦ " καὶ ἐκεῖνο γὰρ διὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἰτίαν Οὖ λέγουσιν. 

Id. ad ll. 15, p. 1001. Ὅτι δὲ τὸ Ο στοιχεῖον Οὗ ἐγράφετο 
καθὰ καὶ τὸ E, ἘΠ, δηλοῦσιν οἱ παλαιοί. Καὶ ἡ αἰτία, ἵνα στοιχιακῶ 


περισπῶνται καὶ αὐτά. 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. QT 


The expressions O μικρόν and 2 μέγα are found 
in Theognostus (C. A. vol. 2. 1), Eustathius, ἀπά. 
Tzetzes ; they were introduced after Q had ceased 
to be distinguished, in pronunciation, from O. ‘The 
term μέγα applies only to the later form ὦ, which 
was introduced about the middle of the second 
century before Christ (. 1. pp. 230 — 232), and 
has the appearance of oo united into one form. 
Athenzeus uses simply Οὗ for O μικρόν. It has been 
supposed that O and 2 were once distinguished 
from each other only by their size; but in the most 
ancient inscriptions in which O represents ο, ὦ, ou, 
this distinction is not observed, except merely that 
the character O is often made smaller than the 
other letters. (1. Δ. p. 45.) And in inscriptions 
belonging to the Alexandrian and Roman periods, 
all the round letters, O, 2, O, are often found smaller 
than the rest. (EL. E. pp. 149. 231.) 

The expressions, Ε ψιλόν and Y ψιλόν occur in 
Cheeroboscus (in Cramer’s Anecdota), Theognos- 
tus (tbid.), and in Tzetzes ; the first of these ex- 
pressions occurs also in Photius (4. D. 886). Plu- 
tarch, Athenzeus, and Herodian use Ei for E ψιλόν. 
The term ψιλόν here seems to mean bare, that is, 
nameless, and refers to the fact that the names of 
these two letters are the same as the letters them- 
selves; and it is not improbable that O also would 
have been called ψιλόν, if it had not been acciden- 
tally smaller than ὦ. ‘There is no evidence that E 


28 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


and Y were, by the Greeks, ever employed to de-— 
note the rough breathing and the Digamma respec- 
tively. If the epithet ψιλόν, in this case, meant 
smooth, as opposed to δασύ, rough, then H ought to © 
have had it, because it originally denoted the rough 
breathing. And to suppose that these letters were | 
so called in order to distinguish them from the — 
Phoenician He and Vav is to assume that the later 
Greeks were so intimately acquainted with the 
Phoenician language and literature that the school- — 
boys were in constant danger of confounding E 
with 7 and Y with }. 

These expressions, namely, Εἰ ψιλόν, Y ψιλόν, 
Ὁ μικρόν, and 2 μέγα, occur also in ἃ grammatical 
work attributed to Draco, who is supposed to have 
lived during the latter part of the second century 
after Christ. But as that work is full of interpola- 
tions, some of which are evidently to be attributed to 
the early modern Greek grammarians, its authority, 
in such questions as this, has little or no weight. 


Photius, Biblioth. p. 151 (487,251), ed. Bekker. Ἀπολλώνιος 

᾿ ἐν τοῖς TOU Φιλοπάτορος χρόνοις ἐπ᾿ ἀστρονομίαι περιβόητος γεγονὼς 
ον E [various reading, E ψιλόν] ἐκαλεῖτο, διότι τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ E συμ- 
περιφέρεται τωῖ τῆς σελήνης, περὶ ἣν ἐκεῖνος μάλιστα ἠκρίβωτο. ‘This 
joke has reference to €, one of the latest forms οὕ E. (E. E. 
p. 231.) 


It may be remarked here, that, in many parts of 
European Greece, the schoolboys, in spelling, use 
the terms ψιλόν and μικρόν only when E, Y, and O 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 29 


each constitute a syllable; as, ΦΙ EY SEY, Γάμμα 
D μέγα TO, φεύγω; Karna μέγα KO, GO Σίγμα 
OS, κωφός; Ε ψιλὸν E, Xi Ω μέγα ΧΩ, ἔχω: 
Υ ψιλὸν Υ, It O ΠΟ, ὑπό. As to A, I, H, they sub- 
join povayn, alone, to them, when they each form a 
syllable ; as, "ἄλφα μοναχή, Tappa 2 μέγα TQ, ayo. 


5.21. 


The Digamma, the sixth letter of the original 
alphabet, corresponds to the Phoenician Ovad, Vav, 
and to the Latin F. In the Boeotic and Pelopon- 
nesian inscriptions it is represented by δ᾽; in the 
Heraclean ‘Tables and in the Cretan inscriptions, 
by C. 

In the latest numerical system, it is represented 
chiefly by Ε or s, the latter of which forms coincides 
with the abbreviation ¢ for στ, and has often been 
mistaken for it. (E. E. p. 351.) 

As to its name, the Greek grammarians call it 
Aiyappa, that is, double gamma, because Ff’, to which 
this appellation strictly applies, has the appearance 
of IT united into one form. The Roman gramma- 
rians call it Digamma or Vau. Its Phoenician name 
would have been, by the early Greeks, written Fad, 
by the later Greeks, Οὐαῦ or Bad; in the Septuagint 
it is written Ovad; neither Fad, however, nor Bad 
is found in any Greek author. 

The Digamma was used by all the early Greeks. 


The Ionian tribe, however, must have discontinued 
3 * 


30 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


the use of it very early, for it is found neither in 
Attic nor [onic inscriptions, except the pre 
(6.7. 2. 10). 

According to the ancient grammarians, the Di- 
gamma was sounded like OY or OI ; Dionysius says 
that it had the sound of OY, or of the Roman Κ΄; 
Priscian states that it was equivalent to the Latin 
V; from which it is inferred that it was essentially 
the same as the English W. Sometimes it was a 
mere breathing; as, ἄμμες δ᾽ Ῥειρήναν. 

The vowel Y corresponds to F, that is, it bears 
the same relation to it that the Latin U does to V, 
or 7] to J. Its most ancient form V is essentially 
the same as one of the forms of the Phoenician Vav. 
On a coin belonging to Capua, we find KAIIF... 
for ΚΑΠΥ...., that is, Καπυανῶν. (Eckhel, 1). N.1, 
p. 110.) In inscriptions belonging to the first three 
centuries of the Christian era, f is sometimes rep- 
resented by y, the same as the Latin y; as, C. I. n. 
9150. 3155. KarretwXioy, στεφανηφόρον, Μειδίογ. 


Herod, 4, 110. Τὰς δὲ Ἀμαζόνας καλέουσι οἱ Σκύθαι Οἰόρπατα- 
δύναται δὲ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο κατὰ Ἑλλάδα γλῶσσαν ἀνδροκτόνοι: Οἷόρ 
γὰρ καλέουσι τὸν ἄνδρα, τὸ δὲ πατά, κτείνειν. This οἱόρ is the 
same as the Teutonic wer, and the Latin vir. 

Dionys. Rom. Ant. 1,20. ‘EX adn, ἃ viv κατὰ τὸν ἀρχαῖον τῆς 
διαλέκτου τρόπον Οὐέλια ὀνομάζεται. Σύνηθες yap ἦν τοῖς ἀρχαίοις 
Ἕλλησιν, ὡς τὰ πολλὰ, προτιθέναι τῶν ὀνομάτων ὁπόσων αἱ ἀρχαὶ ἀπὸ 
φωνηέντων ἐγίνοντο τὴν OY συλλαβὴν ἑνὶ στοιχείων γραφομένην. 
Τοῦτο δ᾽ nv ὥσπερ Τάμμα διτταῖς ἐπὶ μίαν ὀρθὴν ἐπιζευγνύμενον ταῖς 
πλαγίαις, ὡς Fedévn καὶ Favaé καὶ Fotkos καὶ Favnp καὶ πολλὰ τοι- 
avra. ‘The city here referred to is Ἐλέα, Ὑέλη, or Οὐελία, Velia. 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 31 


Trypho,§ 11. προστίθεται τὸ Δίγαμμα παρά τε Ἴωσι καὶ Aio- 
λεῦσι καὶ Δωριεῦσι καὶ Λάκωσι καὶ Βοιωτοῖς. Προστιθέασι δὲ καὶ τοῖς 
ἀπὸ φωνηέντων ἀρχομένοις. ἽὝἌπαξ δὲ παρ᾽ Αλκαίωι τὸ ρῆ ξις καὶ 
Ἐρῆ ξις εἴρηται. 

B. A. p. T77. Σύμβολον οὖν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς [τοῖς Αἰολεῦσι] ἐστιν 
[τὸ Atyappal, ἐκφωνήσεις ἔχον τῆς ΟἹ καὶ OY SuPOdyyov. See also 
above, § 15. 

Priscian. 1, 5, p. 542, ed. Putsch. F Aeolicum Digamma, 
quod apud antiquissimos Latinorum eandem vim, quam apud 
Aeoles habuit ; eum autem proprie sonum, quem nunc habet F, 
significat P cum aspiratione: sicut etiam apud veteres Graecos 
pro ® P et H...... Postea vero in Latinis verbis placuit pro 
P et H, F scribi,..... loco autem Digamma V pro conso- 
nante, quod cognatione soni videbatur affinis esse Digamma ea 
litera. 

Id. 1, 4, p. 545. V-vero loco consonantis posita eandem 
prorsus in omnibus vim habuit apud Latinos quam apud Aeoles 
Digamma. Unde a plerisque ei nomen hoc datur, quod apud 
Aeoles habuit olim Digamma, id est Vau, ab ipsius voce pro- 
fectum, teste Varrone et Didymo, qui id ei nomen éSse osten- 
dunt......Adeo autem hoc verum est quod pro Digamma 
Aeolico F ponitur V: quod sicut illi solebant accipere Digam- 
ma modo pro consonante simplici, teste Astyage, qui diversis 
hoc ostendit usibus, ut in hoc versu, Oldpevos Fedevay ἑλικώπιδα, 
sic nos quoque pro consonante plerumque simplici habemus V 
loco Digamma positum: ut, At Venus haud animo nequicquam 
exterrita mater. Est tamen quando iidem Aeoles inveniuntur 
pro duplici quoque consonante Digamma posuisse, ut Νέστορα 
δὲ Fo madds...... Digamma F' Aeoles est quando pro nihilo 
in metris accipiebant, ut, "Aupes δ᾽ Ἐειρήναν τὸ δέ τ᾽ ἄρ᾽ θέτο Μῶσα 
λιγαία. 

Id. 1, 8, p. 860. Habebat autem haec F litera hunc sonum 
quem nunc habet V, loco consonantis posita; unde antiqui af 
pro ab scribere solent: sed quia non potest Vau, id est Digam- 
ma, in fine syllabae inyeniri, etc. 


oe HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


The Digamma was very often changed into its 
corresponding vowel Y. ‘This is generally the ori- 
gin of the diphthongs av, ev; also of ov, when it does 
not arise from the lengthening of 0; as, δύο, duo, 
two; γραῦς, ναῦς, καυάξαις, αὔξω, αὐξάνω, αὐάτα, αὐτός, 
Ζεύς, evade, εὔϊδε, εὐάλωκε, βοῦς, βουνῶν, βούεσσι. 

In a few instances it was changed into O; as, 
Soav, Oaktos, Οἴτυλος, Oirevs. 

In many instances, it was attenuated into the 
rough breathing ; as, ἅλις, dvddve, ἕτος, ἵδιος, tos. 

Not unfrequently it was changed into B, I, or $; 
as, βείκατι, βιδεῖν, βειλάρχας, Βοινόβιος, Βαναξίβουλος ; 
ἀγρέω, ἄγρυπνος ; Φέσπερος, φέννος. 

The Digamma was probably never doubled ; but 
instead of this, its corresponding vowel Y was pre- 
fixed, and sometimes annexed, to it in the same 
word ; thus, Βακεύξαι, EvFapa, ἀεξυτοῦ. 

Words which originally began with two conso- 
nants, the second of which was the Digamma, often 
appear with one only; as, sweet, suavis, Badus, 
adus, ἡδύς ; σφέ, Fé, & 588; oFvmvos (not used in 
Greek), ὕπνος, SomnUS, ἄτγρυπνος ; SWINE, σῦς, Us, 
SUS. 

Digammated words are found in inscriptions, on 
coins, in Dionysius of Halicarnassus, in Trypho, 
Apollonius the grammarian, Priscian, and He- 
sychius. In the glossary of Hesychius, I is put 
for F, perhaps because in some of the dialects the 
Digamma was changed into I. When, however, 


. HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET, 33 







We compare Fadav, ἐγεηληθίωντι, Feros, F'edyavos, 
| Feros, Ficos, of the inscriptions, with the correspond- 
| ing words Γαδεῖν, Γηλιώμενοι, Γίπον, Γ ελχάνος, Γέτος, 
᾿Γισῖόν, in Hesychius, we cannot persuade ourselves 
{πᾶ Hesychius, or rather his transcribers, did not 
)mistake F for I. 

Some words are found digammated only in Latin 
and other kindred languages; as, ἐννέα, novem, 
permis, Clavis, is, VIS, σκαιός, Scaevas. 

Here follows a list of digammated words :— 


— 


ἀ- privative, Latin ve- (in vecors, vesanus), seems to be di- 
| gammated in the words Tdppopa, ἄμοροι, TaBepyds, depyds, Ta- 
)meheiv, ἀμελεῖν, found in Hesychius. Suidas has Τάμβορος for 


8 compound of ἄγνυμι. which in Athenzeus (2, p. 538) is written 
| μουκηρόβατος (corrected μουκηρόβαγος or μουκηροβαγός). Hesiod. 
| Op. 664, 691. καυάξαις, for the original καταξάξαις, κατεάξαις, 
kaFaéas, after the analogy of κά-βασι for κατάβηθι. 
: ἀγός (ayo), ov, 6, a leader. Hesych. βάγος. 
ἄγω. also ἅγω, Latin ago, to lead. Compare Latin vagor, 
'vagabundus, veho, English wagon, wain, vagabond; 
also Bayos in the preceding paragraph. 

ἅλις, enough. Hesych. Tari. 

ἁλίσκομαι; to be captured. Ahr. 1, ὃ 5. εὐάλωκεν, perfect 
‘for ἑάλωκεν, originally Ἐεξάλωκεν. 
ἄναξ, king. Dionys. Antiq. 1, 20. Favaé. A. H. n. 317. 
tFavayo...., the first part of some proper name beginning with 
ἄναξ. C. 1. n. 1574. 2572. 2577. 1323. Ταναξίων (read Favaéi- 
wv), Βαναξίβουλος, Εὐρυβάνασσα, proper names. Hesych. Bavvas 
for ἄναξ, like μουκηρόβας for μουκηρόβαξ. 
| dyv8dve, to please, second aorist evade, for the original €Fade. 


34 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


Hesych. YavSdvew, Tadeiv, and some derivatives, as Γάσσαν. 
C. 1. n. 1574. τάδων, which in Ulrichs’s copy (see Ahr. 2, 
p. 516) is written Fader, a man’s name, derived from ἁδεῖν. 
Compare γηθέω, Latin suavis, gaudeo, English sweet. 

ἀνήρ, also ἁνήρ, man. Dionys. Antig. 1, 20. Favnp. 

Αρνων, avos, 6, Arnon, a man’s name, derived from τοῦ ἀρνός. 
C. I. n. 1569. Ἑάρνων. 

ἀνύω, also ἁνύτω, to accomplish. Hesych. Taivera, ἀνύει. 

"Aéos, ov, ἡ, Axos, a city in Crete, written also "Oagéos, in ἢ 
Scylax (p. 19) Πάξος. C. 1. n. 3050. Βαύξιος, also, Eckhel, | 
D. N. 2, p. 305. Fags, a native of Azxos. This word, }} 
according to Stephanus Byzantius, is derived from ἄγνυμι, to | 
break. 

ἀσκαρίζω, to hop. Hesych. βασκαρίζειν. | 

ἼΛσκων, wvos, 6, Askon, a man’s name. Ahr. 1, p. 171. | 







| 


Ἑάσκων. 

ἄστυ, city. ἍΝ 1 ἡ 1520, Ἐασστυόχου ; ibid. 20. Ἑασσ....» 
and Eckhel, D. N. 2, p. 196. Facr...., some compound of |} 
ἄστυι Abr. 2, p. 516. Faorinos, Facrvpeddvrios, proper names, ) 
compounded of ἄστυ. 
ἕ, se, him, himself, accusative of the pronoun ¢ Apoll. de ᾿ 
Pronpm. pp. 106, 107. τέ. 
Zap, np, Latin ver, the spring. Hesych. Téap, βηρ-άνθεμον, |} 
Τηρ-ἄνθεμον (read Τηρ-άνθεμον, or rather Ἑηρ-ἀνθεμον). 
ἕδος (Copa), seat. Hesych. βέδος, explained πόλις, ἄγαλμα, ἢ 

στέμμα τι, ἱμάτιον γυναικεῖον. 
ἔθος (ἔθωῚ. custom. Hesych. βεσόν. 
ἔθω, to be accustomed.  Hesych. εὐέθωκεν, for the original |} 
_ Ῥερβέθωκεν, from the root E60-. Compare Latin suesco. 
Lp εἶδον, ἰδεῖν, Latin video, tosee. Etym. Gud. βιδεῖν, ideiv. | 
Ahr. 2, p. 578. εὔϊδε, second aorist, for the original ἔξιδε. ἡ 
Hesych. Τοίδημι, for οἶδα. Compare English wit, wise. 
εἴκοσι, Latin viginti, twenty. C. 1. π. 1511. 1569. 1575, ἢ] 
Είκατι, Doric and Beeotic; TrXatiErves or tAariTetues (read 
Εικατιξέτιες, εἰκοσαετεῖς). Tabul. Heracl. Ἑίκατι or Feikatt, 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 909 


‘| Fexari-reOov ΟΥ̓ Ἐεικατί-πεδον, ΕἸ κατίδειον or Ἐεικατίδειον.  He- 
ἢ sych. βείκατι. But C. I. n. 2166. εἴκοσι, Holic, without the 
‘| Digamma. 
Iss εἴκω, to yield, give way. Hesych. Tiga, εἶξαι ; τὰ βεικηλά. 
| Compare German schwach, weich, English weak. 

εἰλέω (εἴλω), to roll. Tabul. Heracl. ἐγξΕηληθίωντι, ἐξ-ειλη- 
θῶσιι Hesych. Τηλιώμενοι, Τηλουμένους, Doric for εἰλεόμενοι, εἰ- 






| λουμένους. 

εἵλη, 566 ἕλη. , 

εἴλημα (εἰλέω), a covering. Hesych. βέλημα." 
Ἃ εἴλο, toroll. Hesych. Τήνεσθαι (read Γήλεσθαι or rather F7- 
λεσθαι), Doric for εἴλεσθαι. Compare EAYQ, Latin volvo, 
| English wallow, welter, German walzen. 

εἷμα (vy), garment. Hesych. τὰ Τέμματα, Molic for cipa- 
ta; Τῆμα, Doric form. 

εἰπεῖν, to say. Hesych. Τίπον, for εἶπον. 

εἰρήνη (ip), peace. Priscian. 1, 4, p. 545. Ἐειρήναν. 

εἴρω, to join, Latin sero. 

éxas, far. Hesych. Bexds, Beixas, βεκῶς. 

ἕκηλος, εὔκηλος, quiet. Hesych. ΤΈΤ Καλον. 

ἑκυρός, Latin socer, German Schwaher, son-in-law. 

ἑκών, willing. Hesych. Τεκαθά, explained ἑκοῦσα. 

Ἐλάτεια, Elatea. C.I.n. 1569. Ἐελάτια, Fedarijos, Boeotic 
forms. 

ἑλεῖν, to take, hence the Epic Tévro. Hesych. Τέννου, ἑλοῦ. 

Ἑλένη, Helen. Dionys. Ant. 1, 20. Ἐελένη. Priscian. 
1, 4, p. 545. Ἐελέναν. 

ἕλη, or εἵλη, the heat or light of the sun. Hesych. Τέλαν, 
Doric accusative ; βέλα ; Τελοδυτία, ἡλιοδυσία, βελλάσεται, ἡλιωθή- 
σεται. Compare σέλας, σελήνη, Latin sol. 

ἑλίκη (ἑλίσσω), twisting. Hesych. Τελίκη. 

ἑλίσσω, to twirl. Hesych. Τελλίξαι ; Τελλίζειν, explained 
᾿ γαργαρίζειν, gargle. 
ἕλκω, to pull. Compare Latin vellico, sulcus? 
ἊΝ EAAQ, Latin vello, to pull, hence Hesych. TeAda, τῖλαι, 

folic for εἶλαι. 


36 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


ἐλπίς, or ἑλπίς, hope. Hesych. Τέτις (read Γέλπις, or rather 
FeAmts). 

ἔλυτρον (cid, edv-), acovering. Hesych. Τέλουτρον. 

Ἑλχάνος, an epithet of Zeus. Ahr. 2, p. 554. Ἐελχάνος. 
Hesych. Tedxavos. 

ἕννυμι, to clothe. Hesych. Teoria, Τέστρα, Τεῖθρον, ἐστά, de- 


rivatives. Etym. Magn. Béorov, or Bérrov. Compare Latin © 


vestio, vestis (ἐσθής), English vest. 

‘ENNQ, to seat, hence imperative Γέννου in Hesychius. 
᾿ς €vos, Latin annus, year. Hesych. Téwos, φέννος. 
“ ἕξ, Latin sex, English six. Tab. Her. réé, Féxros, Ἐεξή- 
κοντα, Ἐεξακάτιοι. 

ἕπομαι, Latin sequor, to follow. Compare English seek. 

ἔπος (εἰπεῖν), word. C. I. n. 11. Féros. Compare Latin 
vox, English voice. 

ἔργον (ΕΡΓΩῚ), German Werk, English work. Ο I.n. 11. 
Fdpyov, A4olic form. 

ἕρπω, Latin serpo, to creep. 

ἔρρω, to goto destruction. Hesych. Téppo, Τερητηρία, βέρρης, 
Beppever, Bappet. Etym. Magn. βερηδεύει. Compare Latin erro, 
verro. 

ἕσπερος, ἑσπέρα, Latin vespera, evening. Sapph. 48. 
Φέσπερε. 

ἑστία, hearth. Compare Latin Vesta, Ἑστία. 

ἔτη ς (€6w), a comrade, a private citizen. C.I.n. 11. Feéras, 
fXolic form. 

ἔτος, OY ἔτος, year. C. I. n. 11, 1569. Férea, Férca. 
Tabul. Heracl. Féros. Hesych. Yéros, dative Τέτορι. Compare 
Latin vetus, vetustus. 

Exias, Ekhias, a proper name, derived from ἔχω, like Ayias 
from ἄγω. <A. H. n. 327, Fexias. 

ἥδομαι (dvddva), to be pleased. Hesych. Τάδεται, Τάδεσθαι, 
βάδομαι. 

ἦθος (ἔθος, ἔθω), custom.  Hesych. Τήθια, ἤθη. 

ἡλικιώτης) one of the same age, companion. Hesych. βαλι- 
κιώτας, Doric. 





ΝΣ, δ...» . 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. on 


Ἦλες, AXolic and Doric ἾΑλις, Elis. C. 1. n. 11. Ἐαλείοις, 
fEolic for Ἠλείοις. 
Py ἧλος, Latin vallus, nail, peg. Hesych. Ῥάλλοι, Aolic for 
ἧλοι. 
ἰδεῖν, see εἶδον. 
δ ἴδιος, or ἴδιος, own, proper. Tabul. Heracl. τίδιος, Ἑιδίαν 
(for Fidiay?). Compare Latin viduus? 
Ιδρίας, ov, 6, Idrias, a man’s name, connected with ἰδεῖν, 
ἴδρις. C. I. n. 1573. Nidpiao (for Fidpiao ὃ). 
τ ἱέραξ, ἵρη ἕξ, hawk.  Hesych. Beipaxes, ἱέρακες ; βειρακή, ἅρπα- 






κτική. 

ἴλη; or εἴλη, a troop of soldiers. Hesych. βειλαρμόστας, ἴλαρ- 
μόστης ; βειλάρχας, ἰλάρχης. Ahr. 2, p. 516. Ειλαρχιόντων (read 
Ειλαρχιόντων ὃ). 

iv, dative of the personal pronoun’. Hesych. Ti, σοί. 

iéés, Latin viscus, birdlime. 
“tov, Latin viola, English violet. Hesych. Τία, ἴα. 

is, Latin vis, strength, force. 

iodpe (ἰδεῖν, εἰδέναι). to know.  Hesych. Τισάμεναι, infinitive. 

ἴσος, or ἴσος, equal. C.J. n. 1562. 1563. Εισοτέλια, ἰσοτέ- 
hea. Hesych. Τιστόν, ἴσον ; Biwp, ἴσως. But C. I. n. 3640. ἴσως, 
ABolic, without the Digamma. 

ἱστός, loom. Hesych. Τιστίαι. ἱστουργοί. 

ἵστωρ, or ἴστωρ, (ἰδεῖν, εἰδέναι) knower. Ahr. 2, p. 516. 
Evorope (read Είστορες 3). 

ἰσχύς, force. Hesych. Τισχύν, βισχύν. 
ἰτέα, willow. Hesych. Τιτέα. Tarentianus Maurus de Syll. 
2, 658, p. 2397 P. βίτυν, ἴτυν. Compare οἰσύα; also C. 1. n. 
1323. Οἴτυλος, Βείτυλος, in Ptolemy BirovAa ; also Latin vitex, 
English with or withy. 

οἷ, sibi, dative of the pronoun it. Apoll. de Pron: pp. 106. 
107. rot. Hesych. oi, αὐτω. C. 1. n. 1565. No (read Foi ?), 

οἶκος OY oikos, οἰκία, house. Dionys. Ant. 1, 20. Fotos. 
C. I. n. 4. 1563. 1564. 1562. Forxia, Boeotic Fuxia; ibid. n. 
1565. Eouxia (read Foxia) ; ibid. n. 19. redaFouxo, Molic for 

4 


95 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET, 


μέτοικοι. Compare Latin vicus. But C. 1. π. 2166. οἰκήσοισι, 
Holic, without the Digamma. 

οἶνος, Latin vinum, English wine.  Hesych. Toivos, and 
some of its derivatives, as Towées. Hortus Adonidis, p. 244. 
Eowov (read Fowvov). C. I. n. 2576. Βοινόβιος, a man’s name. 

otros, misery.  Hesych. Yoiros. 

ὄργανον (ἔργον, epy-), instrument, implement. Hesych. Τέρ- 
yava, ὄργανα. 

ὄρτυξ, quail. Hesych. Τόρτυξ. 

ὅς, suus, his, possessive pronoun. Priscian. 1, 4, p. 545. 
Foo παιδός.  Hesych. Toi, ἑαυτωῖ (9). ἰδίωι, καὶ owt.  Apoll. de 
Pronom. p. 136. Eov (read Fév). 

οὗ, sui, genitive of the pronoun 7. Hesych. Tio, Beeotic for 
ἕο, ob.  Alceus, 6. Tébev (read FéGev), ἕθεν. 

οὐλαμός (cid), a band of warriors. Hesych. Τολαμός. 

ὀχάνη, or ὄχανον, (ἔχω) the handle of a shield. Hesych. 
ΤΓόλανα (read Τόχανα, or rather Féyava). 

pakos (ρήγνυμι), rag.  AXolic βράκος. 

ρήγνυμι, Latin frango, English break, German brechen. 
Eustath. p. 548. εὐρράγη, aorist passive for ἐρράγη, originally 
éFpdyn ; and αὔρρηκτος for ἄρρηκτος, originally aFpnxros. Com- 
pare English wreck. 

ρῆξις (ρήγνυμι), breaking. Trypho,§ 11. Ἐρῆξις. 

ρήτρα (PEQ, to say), acovenant. C. 1. n. 11. Fparpa, Molic 
form. 

pivos, hide. Hesych. Tpivos. 

ὠνέομαι, to buy. Compare the Latin veneo, venum, 
vendo. 

ὠτειλή (οὐτάω), a wound. Hesych. Tardda, ὠτειλαί. 


In the following words, the Digamma occurs in 
the middle. 


ἀάατος (AAQ), inviolable. Hesych. ἀάβακτος. 


ἀείδω, to sing. C, I. n. 1583. αὐλαξυδός, κιθαραξευδός, κωμα- — 


Fubds, pawaFvdds, tpayaFvdds, for the common αὐλωιδός, κιθαρωι- 


a ΨΝ 


ee Αα, 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 39 


dds, κωμωιδός, ραψωιδός, τραγωιδός, where the part -aFuddés stands 
for -αοιδός, from ἀείδω. Hesych. ἀβηδόνα, ἀηδόνα ; ἀπαβοῖδορ, an 
adverb. 

ἀέλιος, sun. Hesych. ἀβέλιος. Compare ἕλη, above. 

Αἴας, Ajax. Eckhel, D. N. 4, p. 388. Airas. 

αἰεί, always. C. I. n. 1. ἔχοι κλέξος ἄπθιτον aiFet, according 
to the best copies, Ahr. 2, p. 10. Compare Latin aevum, 
αἰών, connected with αἰεί. 

ἀτάομαι (ἄτη, avdra), to be injured.  Hesych. ἀτατᾶσθαι, 
ἀτάτημαι. 

BakxevFaz, a dative singular, C. I. n. 1639. In the Antiqui- 
tés Helléniques (n. 331), the Digamma retains only the perpen- 
dicular line, and the word is accordingly written Baxevia by the 
editor. 

υὐβοῦς, Latin bos, bovis, or. ΟἿ. I. n. 1569. βουῶν, βούεσσι. 
Beeotic for βοῶν, βόεσσι. 

γραῦς, old woman. Hesych. xapaSides, old women. 

Sdios, δήϊος, (daiw) burning. Priscian. 6, p. 264. daFiov. 
Compare δάβελος, δαλός, in Hesychius. 

\Aaos, Davus, a proper name. Priscian. 6, p. 264. AdFos. 

Δημοφῶν, Demophon. Priscian. ibid. Δημοφόξων. 

δήν, long, anadverb. JB. A. p. 949. δοάν. 

Avi, dative of Ζεύς. C. 1. n. 29. Ari. Compare Latin 
divus, diva. 

ἐάω, to permit. Hesych. ἔβασον. ἔασον. 


~ 
+ 


Γπέννέα, Latin novem, English nine. 
Evdpa,apropername. Lckhel, D. N. 2, p. 196. EvFdpa. 
‘Hpaia, Herea, a city in Arcadia. C. I. n. 11. HpFaoios, 

dative plural from HpFaoios, a native of Herea. 
κλείς, KAnis, kKAnis, Latin clavis, key. 
κλέος (κλέω), fame. C.D. n.1; Ahr. 2, p. 10. κλέξος. Com- 

pare Latin celeber, celebro. be 
λαιός, Latin laevus, English left. Compare λαίβα, λαίφα, 

Naira, Nard, a shield, in Hesychius. 

Λαοκόων, Laocoon. Priscian. 6, p. 264. Λαξοκόξων. 


40 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


λευρός, λεῖος, Latin laevis, levis, smooth. 
λούω, Ado, Latin lavo, to bathe. 
ἣν ναῦς, Latin navis, ship. 
véos, Latin novus, English new. 
- νεῦρον, Latin nervus, English nerve. 
dis, Latin ovis, sheep. Priscian. 6, p. 264. drs. 
σάω, save. Compare Latin salvus, salveo, English safe. 
σκαιός, Latin scaevus, left, not right. 
vAn, Latin silva, wood. 
ὠόν, Latin ovum, English egg. Priscian. 6, p. 264. adaFev. 
Hesych. @Bea, od. 


: 


In the Epic and Lyric poets (Homer, Hesiod, 
Alczus, Sappho, Pindar, Aleman, Simonides), a 
number of words, beginning with a vowel, have the 
following peculiarities : 

(a) A short vowel standing immediately before 
them is commonly suffered to retain its place; as, 
Od. 1, 4. ἄλγεα ὃν κατὰ θῦμόν. Alc. 7. ὑπὸ ἔργον. 
Sapph. 2, 9. γλῶσσα ἔᾶγε. Alem. 34. ἐγώνγα 
ἄνασσα. 

(0) The final syllable of the preceding word, if 
short, is commonly made long, as if by position, 
even when it stands in the thesis; as, Od. 1, 5. 
ἀρνύμενος ἥν TE ψύχήν. 

(6) A final long vowel or diphthong, in the the- 
sis, often remains unaltered before these words; as, 
Od. 1, 89. μᾶλλον ἐποτρύνω, καὶ οἱ μένος. 

As most of these words are found or implied in 
the first of the preceding lists, nothing is more 
natural than to suppose that these poets commonly 
pronounced them with the Digamma. It is to be 













HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 41 


Jobserved, however, that, in our copies, N movable, 
Τ᾽, or Τ᾽ is often introduced before these words ; 
jas, Od. 1,117. κτήμασιν οἷσιν ἀνάσσοι. Hesiod. Op. 
32. ἕτερον I” ἄξαις, for ἕτερον Ἑάξαις. Alc. 45. 
Werxw τί Τ᾽ εἴπην, for τι Fetrnv. Alem. 4. Τ᾽ ἄνακτα 
᾿ΐου Ἑάνακτα. Also, οὐκ or οὐχ is used before these 
words for ov; as, ἢ οὐχ ἅλις, for ἢ ov Ῥάλις, Mm 
Homer. 

When a digammated word is preceded by a short 
vowel in the arsis, # was probably changed into TY, 
after the analogy of evade, καυάξαις ; as, φίλε ἑκυρέ, 


A 7 
φιλεύεκυρε; ἄρα ἔρξαν, apaTep~av; ἀπὸ ev, «ποΥ- 


The words to which these remarks apply are 
chiefly the following, with their compounds and 
derivatives : ἄγνυμι, ἅλις, Ἶάλις, ἄναξ, ἁνδάνω, "Apvn, 
APE Υ ] ΤΥ " 9 " ” » 

τοῦ ἀρνὸς, ἄστυ, ἕ, ἔαρ, E0w, εἶδον, εἰκοσι, εἰκω, ELAM, 
= A ¢. 7 Ψ ε / ΤΩΝ, Υ Cay 

εἰπεῖν, EKAS, ἕκαστος, Exupos, exwv, Εἵλατος, ελίσσω, 
ἔλπω, ἕλωρ, ἕννυμι, ἕργω or ἔργω, ΕΡΤῺ to do, ἕσπε- 
ρος, ἔτης, ἔτος, ἦνοψ, Ἰδομενεύς, ἤΓΛιον, ἴον, Ἴρις, Ἶρος, 


Ὑ 3 > / y - “ 53 7 - + x e 
ts, ἰσος, ὑτέα, LTUS, Of, οἶκος, οἶνος, ὃς POSSESSIVE, ov. 


§ 22, 
The prototype of Θ is the Phcenician 7 εΐ, which 
probably had the same relation to 7 αὖ that Koph 
had to Kaph. In the most ancient inscriptions this 
Jetter is always represented by 9; as, C. 1. n. 1. 10. 
AIIOITON, ἄφθιτον, AIOO, λίθου; ἢ. E. ἡ. 1-20. 


OPOOKAHY, Ορθοκλῆς, ΘΑΡΥΠΤΟΛΕΜΟΣ, Θαρυ- 
4 


42 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


πτόλεμος. ‘he grammarians assert, that, before the - 
introduction of the character ©, the combination 
TH was employed. ‘This orthography, however, © 
has not yet been found in any inscription. As to) 
C. I. n. 2057. MESYTHEOS, it is most probably | 
badly copied ; add to this the fact, that the inscrip- | 
tion is not very ancient. | 


Before the introduction of the characters @ and | 


X, the Greeks used ΠΗ͂ for 4, and KH for X, ἢ 
H being equivalent to the rough breathing; as, 
C. 1. n. 3. EKIIHANTOI, Exdavrot, AMENIIHES, 
ἀμεμφές, ΓΡΟΠΗΟΝ, ypodov; EE. BE. n. 1-20. 
MHEIAIIMIIIA...., Φειδιππίδ[ ας], ΔΈΛΠΗΙΣ, Aed- — 
gis, APKHATETAS, apyayeras. The characters & | 
and X, however, are found in some of the most 
ancient inscriptions; as, C. 1. n. 1. 4. 10. 11. 1599. Ὁ 
1640. ἔχοι, τύχα, σφέλας, γράφεα, Δεσχρώνδας, Ἔφιπ- 


σος. 


Plutarch. Sympos. Probl. 2, 3, p. 138 C. To yap Φῖ καὶ τὸ Χῖ 
TO μέν ἐστι It, τὸ δὲ Κάππα δασυνόμενον. 

B. A. p. 780; Villois. Anecd. 2, p. 121. *Av ἤθελον γράψαι 
λέξιν ἔχουσαν τὴν ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ Θ, ἔγραφον ἀντὶ τοῦ Θ τὸ T, καὶ 
πρὸς τοῦτο ἐτίθεσαν τὸ παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς σημεῖον τῆς δασείας, ἐνδεικνύμενοι — 
ὅτι τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι T ἀλλὰ Θ τηῖ ἐκφωνήσει. Αντὶ δὲ THs ἐκφωνήσεως — 
τοῦ ᾧ ἔγραφον τὸ Il, προστιθέντες, ὡς προείρηται, τὸ παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς ση- ~ 
μεῖον τῆς δασείας. Αντὶ δὲ τῆς τοῦ Χ ἐκφωνήσεως τὸ K ἔγραφον, τὸ 
σημεῖον τῆς δασείας προστιθέντες. . .. .. Πρὶν γὰρ ταῦτα ἐπινοηθῆναι 
τοῖς ἐναντίοις ἐχρῶντο, οἷον εἰ ἠθέλησαν Χ ποιῆσαι; ἐποίουν K καὶ E 
[write ΕἼ], εἰ δὲ ©, ἐποίουν TE [write ΤΕ ], εἰ δὲ Φ, πάλιν ὁμοίως 
II καὶ δασεῖαν, ὡς νῦν Ῥωμαῖοι. In Cramer’s Anecdota, vol. 4. 
».- 325, Γ΄ is used for E. 











HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 43 


Priscian. 1, 5, p. 542. Eum autem proprie sonum quem 

nunc habet F, significat P cum aspiratione : sicut etiam apud 
_ veteres Graecos pro® Pet ΗΠ. Unde nunc quoque in Graecis 
᾿ nominibus antiquam scripturam servamus pro ® P et H ponen- 
tes, ut Orpheus, Phaéthon. Postea vero in Latinis verbis pla- 
cuit pro P et Η, F scribi, ut Fama, filius, facio...... Aspi- 
ratio ante vocales omnes poni potest, post consonantes vero 
_ quatuor tantummodo, more antiquo Graecorum, C, T, P, R. 
Victorin. p. 2459, ed. Putsch. Graeci sequebantur sonum 
 tantummodo literarum © Φ X; priusquam a Simonide inveni- 
rentur, exprimebant juxta T et juxta II et Καὶ aspirationis notam 
_ H ponendo. 
_ Diomed. 2, p. 417, ed. Putsch. H quoque interdum conso- 
mans, interdum aspirationis creditur nota. Haec si Οὐ mutae 
ΒΡ] ποία fuerit, X notat Graecam; si P praeposita fuerit, Φ 
_ significat. Item si T' praeposita fuerit aspirationi, pro © ponitur 
Graeca. 


§ 23. 


The prototype of Z is the Pheenician Zain, 
which, in the Septuagint, is represented by Z; as, 
Ζαχαρίας, Ζοροβάβελ, Taga. ‘This letter is found 
in some of the most ancient inscriptions ; as, C. 1. 
n. 30. 165. Ζηνός, Πολύξηλος ; Ε΄. BE. n. 52. Κλα- 
ζομένιοι ; see also LH. Κ΄. pp. 21. 22. 
| The ancient grammarians call Z a double con- 

sonant, equivalent to 34, not because they re- 
garded it as a mere abbreviation for 34, but because 
it generally made the preceding short syllable long 
by position, and because the AZolians and Dorians 
very often used }4 where the Jonians employed Z ; 
as, φρώζω, φράσδω, which implies a difference of 


44 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


pronunciation as well as a different mode of spell- 
ing. ‘This commutation does not take place at the 
beginning of a word; thus we find, C. J. n. 2167. 
Ζόννυξος, AXolic for Acwvicos. As to such forms as 
σδυγός, devs, they were most probably introduced 
by the grammarians as illustrations of the commu- 
tation of Zand 34. The Beeotians and Megarians 
often used 44, and the Tarentines $3, for Z, but 
only in the middle of a word, which, however, does 
not prove that Z had the sound of 44 or ΣΣ. Had 
Z been sounded like 34, Dionysius and Quintilian 
would not have admired its beautiful sound, and 
the Roman grammarians would not have said that 
the Latin had no sound corresponding to it. As 
to its making position, this was owing to its strong 
vocal hissing. 

Fourmont, a well-known forger of very ancient 
Greek inscriptions, taking it for granted that the 
Italian and German pronunciation of Z was the 
true Greek pronunciation, employed, in his spurious 
inscriptions, 4 for Z. As to the inscription, E. £. 
p. 345. SOTSOTOSAES, found on an Agrigentine 
vase, and made to read Ywfou τοῦ Sans, The vase 
of Sozus the son of Saé, it is nothing more than a 
string of Greek letters engraved on it by way of 
ornament, and may as well be read SOT SOT O 
SAES. ‘Those who read Σ᾽ ώζου τοῦ Yays suppose 
that this Sozus was a Lycian by birth, and conse- 
quently, according to the custom of his country, 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 45 











the son of his mother and not of his father; for 
| Αύκιοι τὰς γυναῖκας μᾶλλον ἢ τοὺς ἄνδρας τιμῶσι, καὶ 
'καλοῦνται μητρόθεν. (Nicol. Damascen. p. 275, ed. 
i Coray.) 

Before the introduction of 2 and ¥, the olians 
and Dorians used KS for 3, and ΠΣ for ¥; as, 
C. I. n. 8. ΔΈΚΣΑΙ, δέξαι; E. Ε. π. 1-20. PEK- 
SZANOP, Ῥηξάνωρ, ISHN, Ψήν. The Beeotians, 
however, although a branch of the Aolic race, used 
me for 2; as, C. I. n. 25. 1639. EXS, ἐξ, ΔΕΧΣΟ- 
INI, Δέξωνι. ‘The Athenians used X¥ for 2, and 
i> for ¥; as, C. I. n. 76. 145. 139. 160. EAOX- 
ZEN, ἔδοξεν, XITNEAEXZAMEN, ἔξυνελέξαμεν, 
TPL , γρύψ, ΑΝΕΤΡΑΦΣΑΝ, ἀνέγραψαν. The 
‘characters 2 and ¥ are found in some of the most 
ancient inscriptions; as, C. 1. n. 37. 39. δέξεται, 
‘Doric, Ἑρμησιάναξ, Ionic; see also E. E. pp. 21. 
92, 


Dionys. de Comp. 14. Διπλᾶ δὲ λέγουσιν αὐτὰ ἤτοι διὰ τὸ σύν- 


θετα εἶναι, τὸ μὲν Z διὰ τοῦ Σ καὶ A, τὸ δὲ Ξ' διὰ τοῦ Κ καὶ Σ, τὸ δὲ 
Ψ διὰ τοῦ Π καὶ Σ, συνεφθαρμένων ἀλλήλοις καὶ ἰδίαν φωνὴν λαμβα- 
᾿ψόντων - ἢ διὰ τὸ χώραν ἐπέχειν, δυοῖν γραμμάτων ἐν ταῖς συλλαβαῖς 
παραλαμβανόμενα. 

Β. A. p. 632. διπλᾶ δὲ εἴρηται ὅτι ἕν ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἐκ δύο 
συμφώνων σύγκειται, τὸ μὲν Ζ ἐκ τοῦ Σ καὶ Δ, τὸ δὲ Ξ' ἐκ τοῦ K καὶ 
3, τὸ δὲ Y ἐκ τοῦ Π καὶ Σ. 

Ibid. p. 780; Villois. Anecd. 2, p. 121. “οταν δὲ ἤθελον συγ- 
γράψαι λέξιν ἔχουσαν τὴν τοῦ Z ἐκφώνησιν, ἔγραφον τὸ Σ καὶ A ἀντὶ 
[rod Z, ὥσπερ καὶ νῦν εὑρίσκομεν παρὰ τοῖς Δωριεῦσιν. Αντὶ δὲ τοῦ 
=, K καὶ Σ, ἀντὶ δὲ τοῦ Ψ, II καὶ Σ. 


Ibid. p. 815. Καὶ ἔτι λέγουσιν ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ δύο συμφώνων τὰ 


46 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


διπλᾶ, ἐπειδὴ ὁ Ὅμηρος τὸ Z ov κατ᾽ ἐπέκτασιν λαμβάνει, οἷον “ Οἵ re 
Ζάκυνθον évvaoy,” καὶ ““ ἄστυ Zedeins.” ἴἤΑλλως τε εἰ συγχωροῦμεν 
αὐτὰ δύναμιν ἔχειν δύο συμφώνων, ἐπειδὴ οἱ Αἰολεῖς κατὰ τὴν προφο- 
ρὰν τοῦ ζυγός σδυγός γράφουσι καὶ κατὰ τὴν προφορὰν τοῦ ξίφος 
κσίφος [read σκίφος 3], καὶ κατὰ τὴν προφορὰν τοῦ ψέλλιον 
σπέλλιον, ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως οὐ δεῖ τὰ κατὰ διάλεκτον ἰδιάζοντα εἰς κοινὸν 
παραλαμβάνειν. 

Gregor. Corinth. ΖΕοΙ. 39, pp. 618. 661. Αντὶ δὲ rod ὶ ΚΣ 
προφέρουσι [οἱ Αἰολεῖς], ξένος κσένος, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ Ψ, IIS, Πέ- 
λοψ Πέλοπς-. 

Victorin. p. 2459. = autem varie [exprimebant], nunc per 
K et 3, nunc per © [read X] et 3. Item ¥ nunc per B® [read 
5], nunc per ΠΣ. . 

Diomed. 2, p. 417. Sicut P et S simul positae ¥ Graecam 
afferunt. 


It has been asserted that the prototype of 3 is” 
the Phoenician T'sade, and that Z and #, when they 
were adopted by the Greeks, exchanged names, © 
Ζῆτα being a modification of Τσαδή, and Ei of Zaiv; 
also, that at first & was not used, the Greeks, as 
such, having always avoided the combinations TS, 
AX, ©; and that, in process of time, it became 
the representative of KX or X3. ‘These suppo- 
sitions, however, are contradicted by the fact, that 
the most ancient forms of the Greek & in no way 
resemble the Phoenician T7'sade. ‘The name Zz is 
formed after the analogy of Ili, $7, Xi, Wi; as 10. 
the name Ζῆτα, it is no more related to Τσαδή than 
its neighbours Βῆτα, Δέλτα, τα, Θῆτα, Iara are, 
all of which end in -va. In the Septuagint, Tsade 
is represented by 3; as, Μελχισεδέκ, Σιών, Σαβαώθ. 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 47 


— 


In the Ionic alphabet, & occupies the place of 
Σάμεχ, which corresponds to Σέγμα. 


§ 24. 


Kara corresponds to the Phoenician Kaph, 
Latin C, and Κόππα to Koph, Latin Q. ‘The Greek 
@ was used by the Dorians, and was regularly fol- 

lowed by O or by a consonant and O; as, C. 1 n. 7. 
29. 31. 37. 166. ITAQON, Πάκων, QOPINOOOEN, 
Κορινθόθεν, QOIOX, Koios, HOPQON, ὅρκον, AT QO- 
AOPKAS, Λυκοδόρκας; Eckhel, D. N. 1, pp. 170. 
242. STPAQOZION, Συρακουσίων, QPOTON...., 
Kpotov....; E. Εν. ἡ. 1-20. MAAHQO...., Ma- 
Anxo....; thid. p. 46. HEQTOP, “Exrtwp. This 
orthography shows that the Dorians were fully 
aware of its Phoenician deep guttural sound (kw) ; 
but as they could not easily make the distinction 
between this letter and its kindred K, they used it 
only before the vowel-sound O, which readily co- 
alesces with the guttural Q. The Romans, in order 
to preserve its guttural sound, invariably annexed 
a U to it, which vowel thus used merely indicated 
that Q was guttural; without this accompaniment, 
Q would not have differed from C or K. This 
being the case, such forms as, C. 1. n. 32. QEIPI- 
AEO, EOEQEN may justly be looked upon with 
suspicion. 

Σίγμα and Sav were two distinct letters, the 
former corresponding to Samech, and the latter to 


48 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


Shin. The original form of Σίγμα was 4, the 
prototype of s, σ, and of the Latin s; that of Say 


was cS x, or M. In the most ancient Molic in- | 


scriptions, only Σέγμα is used; as, C. I. n. 11. 1599. 
Σίγμα is also used in all the Attic inscriptions cut 


before the eighty-sixth Olympiad (B. C. 432); _ 


also, in the Delian inscription, written in the Ionic 
dialect, C. J. ἢ: 10. 

In the most ancient Doric inscriptions, Yav is 
almost always used. ‘he Doric pronunciation of 
this letter was much stronger than that of the Ionic 
Σίγμα, and probably resembled somewhat that of 
its prototype Shin. ‘This strong sound is still to be 
heard in many parts of continental Greece, for 
which the more polite Phanariots would often ridi- 
cule the Greeks of Epirus, Macedonia, and Thes- 
saly. The Pindaric expression, Σὰν κίβδηλον, spu- 
rious or impure San, seems to have reference to 
this sound, and not to that of the A®olic and Ionic 
Σίγμα. 

In process of time, the Atolians and [onians re- 
jected the character S and substituted ¥ in its 
place ; hence, in inscriptions belonging to Ionia and 
AXolis, in later Boeotic, and in Attic inscriptions cut 
after the eighty-sixth Olympiad, only > with its 
modifications is used. ‘The lonians, after rejecting 
the character S, Scyua, gave its name to its succes- 
sor, 3, Sav. ‘This explains the remark of Herodo- 
tus, that the letter called Σέγμα by the lonians was 


a 





a 


HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 49 


called Σάν by the Dorians. ‘This confusion of Yay 
and Siyua was not uncommon even in Palestine ; 
thus, the descendants of Ephraim could not pro- 
nounce 5.1. 

The Greek had no sound corresponding to SH ; 
the Seventy represent Shin usually by 3; as, Supe- 
ov, Σαμψών, Σαμουήλ ; sometimes by ΣΣ ; as, Ac- 
coup, the prototype of Accupia. 

Korma and Sav were used also as brands on 
horses, which, thus marked, were respectively 
called Κοππατίαι or Κοππαφύόραι, and Σομφόραι or 


Satpopar.’ seh) —Tyed) « Toyed\ loge, } « P< 

Herod. 1,139. Τὰ οὐνόματά σφι ἐόντα ὁμοῖα τοῖσι σώμασι καὶ 
τηῖ μεγαλοπρεπείηι τελευτῶσι πάντα ἐς τωὐτὸ γράμμα, τὸ Δωριέες μὲν 
Sav καλέουσι, Ἴωνες δὲ Σίγμα. 

Dionys. de Comp. 14. λχαρι δὲ καὶ ἀηδὲς τὸ Σ, καὶ εἰ πλεονά- 
σειε σφόδρα λυπεῖ... .. τῶν γοῦν παλαιῶν σπανίως ἐχρῶντό τινες 
αὐτωῖ καὶ πεφυλαγμένως. Ἑἰσὶ δὲ οἱ ἀσίγμους ωἰδὰς ὅλας ἐποίουν " 
δηλοῖ δὲ τοῦτο Πίνδαρος ἐν οἷς φησι, ““ Πρὶν μὲν ἤριπε σχοινοτενῆ 
φωνήεντα διθυράμβων καὶ τὸ Σὰν κίβδαλον.᾽" 

Athen. 10. 81, p. 454. Νεοπτόλεμος δ᾽ ὁ Παριανὸς, ἐν τωῖ Περὶ 
Ἐπιγραμμάτων, ἐν Χαλκηδόνι φησὶν ἐπὶ τοῦ Θρασυμάχου τοῦ σοφιστοῦ 
μνήματος ἐπιγεγράφθαι τόδε τὸ ἐπίγραμμα ’ 

Τυὔνομα Θῆτα Ῥῶ "Adda Σὰν Ὗ Μῦ ἔἼΑλφα Xi Οὗ Sav, 
Πατρὶς Χαλκηδὼν, ἡ δὲ τέχνη σοφίη. 

Id. 11, 30, p. 407. To δὲ Sav ἀντὶ τοῦ Σίγμα Δωρικῶς εἰρήκασιν. 
Οἱ γὰρ μουσικοὶ, καθάπερ πολλάκις Ἀριστόξενός φησι, τὸ Σίγμα λέγειν 
παρηιτοῦντο. διὰ τὸ σκληρόστομον εἶναι. καὶ ἀνεπιτήδειον αὐλωῖ. Καὶ 
τοὺς ἵππους τοὺς TO Σ ἐγκεχαραγμένον ἔχοντας Σ αμφόρας καλοῦσιν. 

Schol. ad Aristoph. Nub. 23. Κοππατίας ἵππους ἐκάλουν 
ois ἐγκεχάρακτο τὸ K στοιχεῖον " ὡς Σαμφόρας τοὺς ἐγκεχαραγμένους 
τὸ Σ. Τὸ γὰρ Σ καὶ τὸ Ν χαρασσόμενον Σάν ἔλεγον. Αἱ δὲ χαράξεις 

Ὁ 





50 HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


αὗται καὶ μέχρι τοῦ viv σώζονται ἐπὶ τοῖς ἵπποις. Συνεζευγμένου yap 
τοῦ Κὶ καὶ Σ τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ ς ἀριθμοῦ δύναται νοεῖσθαι, οὗ προηγεῖται 
τὸ Κ. Καὶ παρὰ γραμματικοῖς οὕτω διδάσκεται καὶ καλεῖται Κόππα 
ἐννενήκοντα. 

Schol. ad Arist. N. 122. Σαπφόραι δὲ οἱ Σίγμα ἔχοντες περὶ 
τὸν μηρόν. ert 

Hesych. Κοππατίας, ἵππος kexavpévos, ἐντετυπωμένον ἔχων on- 
μεῖον τὸ Κόππα, ὅ ἐστι ἀπεστραμμένον P καὶ Σ...... It may be 
remarked here, that the Greek word for brand, that is, a mark 
made by burning with a hot iron, is καῦμα, found in a Beotic 
inscription (C. 1. n. 1569.) 

Suidas. Κοππατίας ἵππους ἐκάλουν ois ἐγκεχάρακται τὸ Καὶ 
στοιχεῖον " ὡς Σαμφόρας τοὺς ἐγκεχαραγμένους τὸ Σ καὶ N χαρασ- 
σόμενον ἄλλοις. Σάν γὰρ ἐκείνους ἔλεγον. Ai δὲ χαράξεις αὗται ἔτι 
καὶ νῦν σώζονται ἐπὶ τοῖς ἵπποις. Συζευγνύμενον γὰρ τὸ K tat = τὸ 
σχῆμα τοῦ G ἀριθμοῦ κατανοεῖσθαι δίδωσιν, οὗ προηγεῖται τὸ K. Παρὰ 
γὰρ γραμματισταῖς οὕτω διδάσκεται, καὶ καλεῖται Κόππα ἐννενήκοντα. 

Id. Σαμφῴφόρας, εἶδος ἵππου ἐγκεχαραγμένου τὸ Σ σημεῖον. Οἱ 
δὲ Δωριεῖς τὸ Σ Σάν λέγουσι. 

Judg. xii. 6. Μὴ Ἐφραθίτης εἶ; καὶ εἶπεν, Οὔ. Καὶ εἶπαν αὐτωῖ, 
Εἶπον δὴ στάχυς. Καὶ οὐ κατεύθυνε τοῦ λαλῆσαι οὕτως. The fact 
is, they asked him to say Shiboleth and he said Sibdoleth. 

Quintil. 1, 4, p. 27. Ως cujus similis affectu specieque (nisi 
quod paullum a nostris obliquatur) Koppa apud Graecos, nunc 
tantum in numero manet. 


§ 25. 


When the alphabetical numeral system was 
adopted by the later Greeks, the then obsolete 
letters Avyaypa, Kora, and Sav were employed 
to denote 6, 90, and 900, respectively. But since 
the character 3, the true Sav, was at that time 
called Siyua and denoted 200, the grammarians 





HISTORY OF THE GREEK ALPHABET. 51 


employed the Phoenician Shin, TT, A, A, Ἂν to de- 
note 900. ‘The first of these figures is found in an 
Egyptian papyrus (E£. E. p. 352); the second and 
fourth are found in the Chronicon of Eusebius; the 
third is found in Theognostus (C. A. 2. 1, p. 150). 
We observe here that the fourth character is evi- 
dently a modification of the second, but is not 
found in any Phoenician inscription. 

Some modern scholars, perceiving that the last 
of these four forms of Shin had the appearance of 
C (one of the later forms of 3) and II united into 
one form, supposed that its ancient naine was Σὰν 
Π|ὶ, Σάνπι, or Yat, and that it corresponded to the 
Hebrew T'sade ; they assumed, also, that Sav was 
another name for Σίγμα. And because, in the He- 
brew alphabet, 7'sade stands next to Π, they in- 
| ferred that Σάνπι was so called because in the 
original alphabet it stood next to Iz. As, however, 
no ancient author uses this word, it became neces- 
sary to confirm this hypothesis by conjectural emen- 
dation. Now the Scholium on the twenty-third 
line of the Clouds of Aristophanes, being unusually 
unintelligible, offered a fine opportunity for critical 
display ; accordingly, it was made to read as fol- 





δ 2 Λ - 2 ἊΝ 

lows: Κοππατίας ἵππους εκαλουν OLS ἐγκεχάρακται TO 
fal [ὦ / \ 3 7 Ν 

q ONMELOV, WS Σαμφόρας τους εγκεχαραγμενοὺυς TO >: 

/ a ». e 

To yap ‘a καὶ τὸ II χαρασσόομενον ΠΝ αμπὶι ἔλεγον. At 

A A / 3 » 

δὲ χαράξεις αὗται καὶ μέχρι του νυν σωΐζονται ἐπὶ τοις 


ἵπποις. (Aristoph. Nub. 23, ed. Bothe; Euseb. 


52 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Chronic. Scaliger. Animadv. p. 116; Corsin. Not. 
Graec. p. xxv. et seq.) This emendation of course 
fully proves the existence of the word Σαμπί. 


Beda de Indigitatione, as quoted by J. Scaliger, Euseb. 
Animadvers. p. 116. Graeci enim omnibus suis literis expri- 
munt numeros. Verum toto alphabeti sui charactere in nume- 
rorum figuras extenso, tres, qui plus sunt, numeros, notis pro- 
priis, quae ex alphabeto non sunt, depingunt. Prima est s, 
quae dicitur Episemon, et est nota numeri VI. Secunda est 
q, quae vocatur Kophe, et valet in numero XC. Tertia est % , 
quae dicitur Enneacosia, quia valet in numero DCCCC. Quia 
ennea Graece novem Latine, enneneconda nonaginta, enneacosia 
nonningenta, dicitur. 

Favorinus, or Phavorinus. AptOpés..... τὸ δὲ Ω ὀκτακόσια 
ποιεῖ, καὶ ἀκολούθως ἐπάγεται χαρακτήρα [various reading τὴν χα- 
ρακτῆρα] ἥτις ποιεῖ ἐννακόσια. The word ἡ χαρακτήρα is modern. 


| REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
WS 
ye § 26. | 
Tue diphthongs a, 7, were originally written 
AI, HI, Q1; that is, the iota now called subscript 
was written and pronounced like any other iota. 
The AZolians and Dorians began to write H for 
HI in the third person singular of the subjunctive 
active, and aorist subjunctive passive, as early as 
the commencement of the fourth century before 
Christ (say B. C. 325); as, C. I. ὦ. 1841. 1843. 
1850. 2166. 2448. 3640. δόκη, πάσχη, ἐνδεύη, πάθη; 





















REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 53 


χἱρεθῆ, ἀναγραφῆ, ἀνατεθῆ. According to Gregorius 
Corinthius (p. 606), the AZolians wrote also for 
I in the dative singular of the second declension. 
Compare the dative singular of the Latin second 
eclension. ) 

| The omission of this I became very common 
about the latter part of the first century before 
Christ (B. C. 75); thus, in inscriptions belonging 
o that century, a, ἢ, are very often written 4, 
, 2; in those cut after the commencement of our 
era, and in manuscripts, it is generally omitted. 
he transcribers of the Byzantine period commit- 
ted a number of errors with reference to this iota, 
fsome of which still remain uncorrected. 

The early modern Greeks employed the orthog- 
raphy a, 7, », instead of the orginal az, yu, w:, merely 
because they did not pronounce this I; which or- 
thography gave rise to the expression ὑπογεγραμμέ- 
ἵνον Ιῶτα, Tota subscriptum. Herodian (in Cramer’s 
Anecdota), Cheeroboscus (ibid.), and Eustathius 
(A. D. 1150) use προσγράφειν, and Quintilian uses 
dscribere, with reference to it. In manuscripts 
written before the fourteenth century, this I, if writ- 
ten at all, is annexed to the preceding vowel; thus, 
t, nt, ot. The expressions, δίφθογγοι κύριαι, proper 
diphthongs, and δίφθογγοι καταχρηστικαί, improper 
diphthongs, and ὑπογεγραμμένον Iara, occur in the 
early modern Greek grammarians. ‘The terms, 
κυρίως, καταχρηστικῶς, and ὑπογράφειν, as applied to 
5 * 


54 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


diphthongs, occur also in Draco (pp. 4. 9. ed. Her- 
man.) ; but the passages in which they are used 
could not have been written before the time of 
Eustathius. | 


Strab. 14, p. 959 (648). πολλοὶ yap χωρὶς τοῦ I γράφουσι τὰς 


δοτικὰς, καὶ ἐκβάλλουσί ye τὸ ἔθος φυσικὴν αἰτίαν οὐκ ἔχον." Py Te ὁ 


Sext. adv. Gram. ᾿ς 9. ny γὰρ ρθογραφίαν φασὶν ἐν τρισὶ 
κεῖσθαι τρόποις, ποσότητι, “ μερισμωῖ. ἘΠ Vis: aaa οὖν icin 
ζητῶμεν, εἰ ταῖς δοτικαῖς προσθετέον τὸ 1. 7 — a 

Quintil. 1,7. Sicut in Graecis accidit adjectione I litera 
quam non solum dativis casibus in parte ultima adscribunt, 
sed quibusdam etiam interponunt, ut in ληιστηῖ, quia etymologia 
ex divisione inter syllabas facta desideret eam literam. 

When two words were to be united, by crasis, 
into one, if the first ended in a diphthong, the 
second vowel (, v) of that diphthong was dropped. 
before the contraction was effected; as, C. 1. n. 8. 
29. 39. 1688. 2554. 3044. 3047. ἀδελφοί, οἱ ἀδελφοί ; | 
κἀγώ, καὶ ἐγώ; κἀπίστατον, Kal ἐπίστατον ; τἀργεῖοι, 
τοὶ Ἀργεῖοι ; τὠπόλλωνι, τωῖ Ἀπόλλωνι; κἠπί, καὶ ἐπί; 
KIS, καὶ eis; κἄρτεμιν, καὶ "άρτεμιν ; τἠὐπάρηι, τηΐ ἐπά- 
ρηι, τὠγῶνος, τοῦ ἀγῶνος ; κἠπαινέομεν, καὶ ἐπαινέομεν. 
It is observed further, that καί before az, εἰ, ov, drop- 
ped the w; as, C. I. n. 2554. 2321. 3019. καἴτις 
καὶ αἴ TLS; KELKOGL, καὶ εἴκοσι: κοὐκέτι, καὶ οὐκέτι. The 
Elean inscription (C. 7. n. 11) has TOINTATT, tat 
᾿νταῦτ᾽, for twit ἐνταῦθα, with the I remaining after 
the contraction. As to (C. I. n. 3588) KAIMON, | 
καϊμόν, καὶ ἐμόν, it Seems to be an error of the stone- 
cutter; the same inscription has ΚΑΦΥΨΟΥΣ, cad’ 





~ 


ΓΝ 
᾿ 


Oo f aS D Aa ge a2 4 j 


REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 55 


.--- 


ὕψους, καὶ ἀπὸ ὕψους, without the I. The I retains 
its place when it belongs to the second of the syl- 
lables to be contracted ; as, καὶ εἶτα, Kaira. 

C. A. vol. 4, p. 343. Ta δὲ τέσσαρα εἴδη τὰ σύνθετα τῆς συνα- 


λοιφῆς εἰσὶ ταῦτα, ἔκθλιψις καὶ κρᾶσις, ἔκθλιψις καὶ cvvaipects, 


κρᾶσις καὶ συναίρεσις, ἔκθλιψις καὶ κρᾶσις καὶ συναίρεσις. Ἐκθλιψις 


καὶ κρᾶσις, οἷον καὶ ἐγώ κἀγώ...... "Exodus δὲ καὶ συναίρεσις; 

= 3 ‘ ς , > > ’ ~ \ ‘ , 
οἷον ἐμοὶ ὑποδύνει ἐμοὐποδύνει...... Κρᾶσις δὲ καὶ συναί- 
peows, οἷον ὁ αἰπόλος ὡϊπόλος...... Ἔκθλιψις δὲ, κρᾶσις, καὶ 


συναίρεσις, οἷον οἱ αἰπόλοι ὡϊπόλοι. 

The adverbial datives in HI retain the I; as, 
C. 1. n. 1841. 1843. 2483. 3053. ὅπηι, Doric ὅπαι. 
The adverb i, where, was by the grammarians 
written 7 when it meant as. 

The traditional orthography of the ending -ηεφι 
of such Epic datives as Bindu, φαινομένηιφι, requires 
the diphthong HI. - 


Eustath. p. 113. τὸ μὲν ni ἀντὶ τοῦ ὅπου σὺν τωῖ I γράφουσιν 


ra “ , ἃ 3 “a 
οἱ τεχνικοὶ, καθὰ Kal TO Tt καὶ ὅπηι Kat ἄλληι, 6 ἐστιν ἀλλαχοῦ. 


“TO δὲ ἣ θέμις ἐστὶ δίχα προσγραφῆς τοῦ I τιθέασι. 


Id. p. 1251. "λλληι φεύγω, τουτέστιν ἀλλαχοῦ, ἐπιρρηματι- 
κὸν καὶ νῦν ὃν, ὅμως προσγεγραμμένον ἔχει τὸ 1, ὡς ἀπὸ δοτικῆς γεγο- 
νὸς, καθὰ καὶ τὸ ταύτηι; ἀντὶ τοῦ οὕτως, καὶ τὸ ἑτέρηιφι παρ᾽ 
Ἡσιόδωι, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἑτέρως... 

Ο. 4.1. p. 360. παλάμηιφιν [1]. 8, 338] προσγράφει τὸ I 
ἐκ παραδόσεως + ἔχει δὲ κανόνα " αἱ διὰ τῆς SI συλλαβῆς γινόμεναι 
ἐπεκτάσεις προσερχόμεναι ταῖς πτώσεσιν, εἰ μὲν φυλάττουσι τὴν αὐτὴν 
φωνὴν. καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν γραφὴν φυλάττουσι. 

The adverbial datives in -yc1, τασι, are written 
without the I; as, C. 1. n. 87. 158. Αθήνησι:; E. E. 
p. 111. “4γρυλῆσι, “Αλωπεκῆσι; A, A. n. 53. Ολυμπι- 


act. 


56 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Even the dative plural of the first declension was 


sometimes written without this I; as, C. Ln. 71. .ἢ 


73.c. 187-140. αὐτῆσι, riot, ταμίασι, for αὐτηῖσι, 
τηῖσι, ταμίαισι, and these for αὐταῖς, ταῖς, ταμίαις ; 
E. P. p: 126. ἐπιστάτησι for ἐπιστάτηισι, ἐπιστάταις. 

The formula, Εφ᾽ of, on condition that, is, in 
inscriptions, written EG; as, C. 1. ἢ. 93. 1704. 
But Curtius, Anecd. Delph. n. 4. ἐφ᾽ wire. 


C. A. vol. 2. 1, p. 157. Ta eis ΣῚ ἐπιρρήματα εἴτε προπαροξύ- 
νοιτὸ εἴτε προπερισπωῖτο εἴχει τὰ πρὸ τέλους εἴτε διὰ μακροῦ τοῦ A, 
ἢ διὰ τοῦ H, σπανίως δὲ καὶ διὰ τοῦ Q, ὡς ἔχει τὸ Θρίωσιν" οἷον 
Αθήνησι, Θρίασι, θύρασι, Θήβησι. 

According to Eustathius (p. 80), the Attic end- 
ing -ης of the nominative plural of nouns in -evs 15 
τηις, with the diphthong HI. ‘This orthography 
was suggested by such forms as ηίδειν, nixafov, nieuw. 
But it will be recollected, that when the Attic uses 
ἣν for εἰ, the original syllables were εἴ, which in the 
Ionic became ni; as, Attic «Arnis, Ionic κληΐς, com- 
mon κλείς, original Kreis, KAeFis, Latin clavis; Νη- 
pisos, ΝΝηρηΐδος, Nnpeidos. Now the ending -7s comes 
from -ees after the analogy of the dual -ἡ from -ee; 
consequently the orthography τῆς is contrary to 
all analogy. In an Attic inscription we find, C. 1. 
n. 455, πλυνῆς, from πλυνεύς, which would settle the 
question, if it could be referred to the latter part of 
the second century before Christ (B. C. 175). As 
to such nominatives as (A. Π. n. 132) ΜΥΔΑΣῈΣ, 
MAPONES, they can be either Μυλασῆς, Μαρωνῆς, 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 57 












) or Μυλασεῖς, Mapaveis, for -nis, in these inscriptions, 
would have been written -EI> ; they most probably 
‘stand for Μυλασῆς, Μαρωνῆς (from Mapovets, a native 
| of Mapovea). 

The aorist of verbs in -a/va, -a/po, ends in -nva 
Or -ava, -npa or -apa, without the I, because this 
tense is formed from the simple root, and _ be- 
‘cause, in inscriptions of the classical period, these 
}endings are written without the I; as, C. 4. ἢ. 175. 
2314, 2347, 2953. 247. 1907. πημάνας, ἀνέφηνε, κα- 
Onpavtwy, κατᾶραι, ἐπάρει, ἐπάρας, ἦρε, ἤρατο. "The 
ἸΡογίδοῦ οἵ αἴρω 15 ἦρκα, ἦρμαι ; as, C. Le oe 


13137. ἀπηρκώς, ἤρθω. 

The second perfects δέδηα, μέμηνα, πέφηνα, σέση- 
ipa, κέχηνα are written without the I, because they 
icome from the roots 44-, MAN-, GAN-, SAP-, 
|XAN-. 


{ 


C. A. vol. 4, p. 190. Ἐὰν ὁ ἐνεστὼς τηῖ Al διφθόγγωι παραλή- 
YeTaL, τρέπει αὐτὴν ἐν Tot μέσωι παρακειμένωι εἰς H, οἷον φαίνω π έ- 


, 4 , 3 = \ , \ ΄ 
Φφηνα, χαίνω κέχηνα, paiva ἐξ οὗ τὸ μαίνομαι καὶ μέμη να. 





_ The ending of the contracted infinitive of verbs 
jin -dm is, in ancient inscriptions, written -av, τὴν, 
wwhich shows that it is contracted from -aev; as, 
IC. I. n. 2569. 2919. 2058. 3069. τιμᾶν, περιορᾶν, 
'κατασκευᾶν (future), ζῆν; A. A. π. 250. eav twice. 

C. A. 2.1, p. 310. Πᾶν ἀπαρέμφατον δίφθογγον ἔχει κατὰ τὴν 
τελευταίαν πλὴν τῆς πρώτης συζυγίας τῶν περισπωμένων " νοεῖν; χρυ- 


(| cal id 4 an , A ~ > , 
σοῦν, τύπτειν, τύπτεσθαι: βοᾶν μέντοι καὶ γελᾶν οὐκέτι. 


The traditional orthography of the Epic ending 


58 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


-nugt of the subjunctive active requires the diph-— 
thong HI before -ov ; as, εὔπηισι, ὀτρύνηισι. . 
Eustath. p. 1006. Εἴπηισιν, ὀτρύνηισιν, ἐμπνεύσηισιν, 
ἀποστρέψηισιν, ois ἐν τηῖ Tapadnyovon τὸ I προσγέγραπται. 
The traditional orthography of the second person — 
singular of φημί 15 φηίς, and not φής, which shows 
that it is contracted from φάεις, after the Doric © 
manner. | 





Eustath. p. 1578. τὸ φηίς ἐν τωῖ ἐνεστῶτι μὲν κατὰ παράδοσιν Ϊ 
ὀξύνεται καὶ σὺν Tat I γράφεται. Ἢ 

C. A. 2.1, p. 311; also vol. 1. 1,.». 482. οὐδὲν τῶν εἰς ΜῈΝ 
ρημάτων ἐπὶ δευτέρου προσώπου ἔχει τὸ 1+ τίθημι τίθης, δίδωμι δίδως - 
πλὴν τοῦ φημί φηῖς [so accented]. 

Adjectives in τωῖος are written with an JI, θ6- 
cause this ending is contracted from -wios; as, © 
C. 1. n. 2236. 3539. Kwios, wntpwios; A. A. ἡ, 22.9 
132. ratpwins, Κωῖοι. 

Neuters in -@ ov, also, are written with an I, be-. 
cause this ending is contracted from -oiov; as, C. I. 
N. ἡρωῖον. 

C. A. vol. 2.1, pp. 49. 286. Ta διὰ rod wos κτητικὰ διὰ τῆς 
QI διφθόγγου γράφεται, οἷον Kwios, Mivaios, ἡρωῖος, avdpa@ios, 
ἀστρωῖος, πατρωῖος. 

Zoov, animal, was written with an Q1; as, C. I. 
nN. 2448. 3539, ἕωῖον, φυσί-ζωιοςς. ‘The diminutive 
ζώδιον, also, was written with an QI; thus, C. 1. 
ἢ. AOD 37.44. 1 Ol. Loon 


C. A. vol. 2. 1, p. 286. Ζωῖον γίνεται παρὰ τὸ ζῆν, προσγράφε- 
ται δὲ τὸ 1. ΣΙ 
Ibid. p. 216. Ζωῖσον [read Zwtov], τὸ ZQ μέγα σὺν τωῖ I, © 


τὸ Ο μικρὸν - ἀπὸ yap τοῦ ζῶ ρήματος γέγονεν. 





! 








REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 59 


Ibid. p. 121. Ζωίδιον διὰ τῆς QI διφθόγγου. 


Ἐρωιδιός, heron, with the diphthong 21, accord- 
ing to the grammarians. 


C. A. vol. 2.1, p. 214. Ἐρωιδιός, τὸ PO μέγα σὺν tai I, καὶ 


τὸ AI I ἡ παράδοσις; ai δὲ ἐτυμολογίαι διαφοροῦνται. 


Κληΐίξω, with the diphthong HI, because it is 
contracted from κληΐζω, which comes from κλείΐζω. 
The contracted εὐ-κλ είζω, with an EI, occurs in an 


inscription (C. f£. n. 175), which Boeckh unneces- 


sarily changes into ev-«rnifo. ‘The original root is 
«eF-, found in the derivative «XéFos, which occurs 


in the Crisszean inscription (C. J. n. 1), the first 
line of which, according to the best copies, reads, 


Μ 4 + , / 
os» ἔχου KNEFOS ἄπθιυτον αἰἱξεί. 


IIpwipa, prow, with an I, according to the an- 


cient grammarians. (C. A. vol. 2. 1, p. 196.) 


Σ᾿ ὠζω, save, iS, in inscriptions, written with an I; 
thus, C. I. n. 2448. coifo ; Tab. Her. κατε-σωίξαμες 


or κατεσωίσαμες. ‘The original form was σοιζω, 
formed from cca, like χροΐζω from XPO-, hence the 
Doric ἀπέσοιξεν, in Hesychius. 


Χρηΐίζω, C. 1. n. 2483, with an HI, contracted 


from χρηΐζω, which comes from the root XPA-. We 
find, also, C. 1. n. 2448. χρήξω without the I. 


Nov, egg, was also written wiov, with an AI. 


mee, A. tel. 2. V, p: 281.) Ina manuscript of the 
_ Anacreontic odes, it is accented wiov. ‘This orthog- 
: oy and accentuation were suggested by the form 
oiov. ‘The original form of this word was ὠξόν, 
Latin ovum, English egg; hence ὥβεον, weov, ὠϊον. 


60 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 
ΓΝ Ns 
δ ὰ 

§ 27. 


The early Boeotians used AE, OE, for AI, OI; 
as, C. In. 1599. 1647. Aécypwvdas for Aicypavéas, 
Aeschrondas ; Πλαύχαε for Πλαύχαι, Plauchae, ἃ 
dative ; Διωνύσοε for Διωνύσοι, dative of Ζιώνυσος. | 


\ 

υῦ § 28. 
* In order to indicate the original sound of Y (that 
of oo in moon or book), the Beeotians prefixed an O 
to this letter ; so that, in their dialect, OY is long or 
short according as the original Y was long or short; 
thus, in οὔδωρ, covv, κούνες, it is short, like 00 in book ; 
in οὔλη, ἀσουλία, long, like 00 in moon. It is evi- 
dent, therefore, that O in the Beeotic diphthong OF ~ 
is a mere orthographical mark. 


B. A. p. 119. Δέον δέ ἐστι ζητῆσαι, εἰ ἄρα τὸ O προτιθέμενον 
παρὰ Βοιωτοῖς τοῦ Y δύναμιν ἔχει στοιχείου. Καὶ ἔστιν εἰπεῖν ὅτι οὐκ 
ἔχει δύναμιν στοιχείου, ἀλλὰ φθόγγος μόνον ἐστίν. Ὅτι γὰρ οὐκ ἔχει 
δύναμιν στοιχείου δῆλον, εἴγε προσερχομένου τοῦ Y τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον 
φυλάττει. Καὶ γὰρ ὥσπερ τὸ κύνες συνεσταλμένον ἔχει τὸ Y, οὕτω 
καὶ τὸ κούνες συνεσταλμένην ἔχει τὴν κου- συλλαβήν. 

Eustath. ad Il. 1, 10. Νόσος νοῦσος κατὰ τοὺς Ἴωνας μηκύνον- 
τας τὸ Ο τη προσλήψει τοῦ Y, οὗπερ ἀνάπαλιν οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ποιοῦσϊ 
κατὰ τὴν Ηρακλείδου παράδοσιν προστιθέντες αὐτοὶ Twi Y διχρόνωι τὸ 
μικρὸν Ο: καὶ βραχυνομένου μέν φησι βραχύνοντες, μηκυνομένου δὲ 
μηκύνοντες, τὸ ὕλη οὔλη λέγοντες καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ οὔδωρ. 

Priscian. 1, 6, 36, p. 554, ed. Putsch. Illi [Aeoles] enim 
θουγάτηρ pro θυγάτηρ, OY corripientes, vel magis Y sono U soliti 
sunt pronuntiare, ideoque ascribunt O non ut diphthongum faci- 
ant, sed ut sonum Y Aeolicum ostendant...... Quod nos se- 








REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 61 


| cuti, U modo correptuyn modo productum habemus, quamvis 
| videatur OY diphthongi sonum habere. 

| By Aeoles, Priscian here means the Beotians, who were a 
| branch of the A£olic tribe. 


xis Ἷ § 29. 
} About the commencement of the fifth century 
| before Christ (B. C. 425), I long began to be repre- 
| sented by the diphthong EI, in which case E was 
| a mere orthographical mark; thus, in inscriptions 
| cut before the time of Euclides (B. C. 403), we 
| find, A. Ἢ. n. 42. 115. 123. 308. Avetpepovs, Τειθρά- 
|| autos, Τεισίμαχος, Τείσανδρος : in an inscription re- 
_ ferred to the ninety-sixth Olympiad (B. C. 392), 
| we find, C. 71. n. 150. σύμμεικτον ; in another, re- 
| ferred to the hundredth Olympiad (B. C. 376), 
| C. I. n. 1688. ἀποτείσηι ; in another, referred to 
| the third century before Christ (B. C. 225), C.I. n. 
2556. ἀποτεισάτω. As to (C. J. n. 170) Ποτείδαια, 
| referred to the commencement of the fifth century 
| before Christ (say B. C. 430), it is more than prob- 
able that it is the original orthography of Ποτίδαια, 
/ and may be compared with (C. 1. n. 1430) Ποσεί- 
Sava, also with Ποσειδωνία, Toreday, Ποσειδών. After 
| the middle of the second century before Christ, this 
| orthography became very common; as, C. 1. n. 186. 
| 547. 1053. 2737. 386, Εἰσίδοτος, Εἰσίδωρος, καλλι- 
: νείκου, ὑμεῖν, BP net Ἐλευσεῖνι. During the 
first three centuries of our era, EI was often used 
6 


62 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


even for I short; as, Ὁ. I. ἢ. 353. 254. Teiros, 
γυμναᾶσ ε ιαρχήσ ας. 2 

On the other hand, during the last-mentioned 
period (A. D. 1-300), I was often put for EI, 
because this diphthong at that time was pro- 
nounced like I; as, C. 1. n. 294. 2715. Στιριεύς, exe, 


ΓΞ ») 
NLTaveviv, ts. 


Seat. adv. Gram. 1,9. Τὴν yap ὀρθογραφίαν φασὶν ἐν τρισὶ 
κεῖσθαι τρόποις, ποσότητι, ποιότητι, μερισμωῖ. Ποσότητι μὲν οὖν ὅταν 
ζητῶμεν εἰς ταῖς δοτικαῖς προσθετέον τὸ 1: καὶ εὐχάλινον καὶ εὐώ- 
Sivas τωῖ I μόνον γραπτέον ἢ τηῖ ΕἸ. 

Quintil. 1. . Diutius duravit ut EL, I, jugendis eadem ra- 
tione qua Graeci EI uterentur..... quod quidem cum super- 
vacuum est, quia J tam longae quam brevis naturam habet, 
tum incommodum aliquando. 

Gell. 19, 14. Graecos non tantae inscitiae arcesso qui OY 
ex O et Y scripserunt, quantae qui EI ex E et I: illud enim 
inopia fecerunt; hoc nulla re subacti. 

This refers to such forms as οὔλη, ἀσουλία, Kovves, ovdap, 
ἀποτεῖσαι, ὑμεῖν. 

Priscian. 1,9. JI quoque apud antiquos post E ponebatur 
et EJ diphthongum faciebat, quam pro omni J longa scribebant 
more antiquo Graecorum. 


§ 80. 


In inscriptions belonging to the first three centu- 
ries of our era, E is often put for AI, which merely 
shows that the stone-cutter often spelled as he pro- 
nounced; as, C. I. n. 628. 1051. 1066. 1067. 


“Hoeotos, κεκρυπτε, δόξες, μυρίες. 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 63 
: \ ή 
νὰν § 31. 

According to the ancient grammarians, YI cannot 
stand before a consonant or at the end of a word ; 
thus, they write λελῦτο, πήγνῦτο, δαινῦτο or δαίνυτο, 
ἐκδῦμεν, for the analogical λελυῖτο, πηγνυῖτο, SawvtTo, 
ἐκδυῖμεν : ὕδιον, μύδιον, ἰχθύδιον, for υἵδιον, μυίδιον, 
ἰχθυίδιον. The MMolic dialect, however, has τυΐδε, 
μέσυι, ἄλλυι, TOUTUL, ἀτέρυι, πήλυι. 


Eustath. pp. 938. 1047. 1294, Μηδέποτε μετὰ τὴν YI δίφθογ- 


γον εὑρίσκεσθαι σύμφωνον. 

Cramer’s Anecd. vol. 2. 1, p. 121. Μῦς μυός μυΐδιον; καὶ 
ἐν συγκοπηῖ τοῦ I μύδιον" τοῦ γὰρ Y καὶ I εἰς τὴν YI δίφθογγον 
συναιρεθῆναι μὴ δυναμένοις διὰ τὸ μηδέποτε τὴν ΟἹ [read YI] δίφθογ- 
γον ἐπὶ τέλους λέξεως μήτε μετὰ συμφώνου εὑρίσκεσθαι, ὡς εἴρηται; 
ἐξέπεσε τὸ I καὶ ἔμεινε μόνον τὸ Y. 

The ending of the optative active of verbs in τύυμι 
is written without the characteristic I; thus, τῦην. 
According to the grammarians, the I is omitted in 
the active merely because it is necessarily dropped 
in the passive ending -vyyv. ‘The diphthong YI, 
however, is changed into TY long, also, in ὑός for υἱός, 
and in the perfect active ‘participle feminine, as, 
παρειληφῦα (Boeckh’s Athen. Nav. p. 540) ; and the 
characteristic I is dropped, also, in the AXolic forms 
λαχόην, σύνεαν, for λαχοίην, συνεῖεν. 

Bekker’s Anecd. p. 1292. Ζευγνύην γὰρ καὶ ὀμνύην χωρὶς 
τοῦ I. Καὶ λέγει ὁ Ἀπολλώνιος ταύτην τὴν ἀπολογίαν ὅτι τὸ ζευγνύ- 
nv καὶ τὸ πηγνύην καὶ τὸ ὀμνύην προσθέσει τοῦ M παθητικὸς γίνε- 


- , , > , > ᾿ 
ται, οἷον ζευγνύμην, πηγνύμην, ὀμνύμην. Ei εἶχον οὖν τὸ I 


64 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


, “ “ 
κατὰ τὴν παραλήγουσαν, ἤμελλον ἀποβάλλειν αὐτὸ ἐν τοῖς παθητικοῖς, 
ἐπειδὴ μετὰ τὴν YI δίφθογγον σύμφωνον οὐχ εὑρίσκεται ἐπιφερόμενον, 

- “ 3 3 = 
οἷον ἅρπυια, μυῖα, vids. Ὃ οὖν εἶχον ἀποβάλλειν ἐν τοῖς παθητι- 


΄- ͵΄ 3 "“ 3 a 
κοῖς, προαπέβαλλον ἐν τοῖς ἐνεργητικοῖς. 


\)- § 32. 


The diphthong NY owes its existence entirely to 
CTaSIS ; AS, ὁ αὐτός, WUTOS ; τοῦ αὐτοῦ, TWUTOD ; TO αὐτό, 
τωὐτό ; ὦ Εὐριπίδη, οωὐριπίδη. As to wv in the Ionic 
words ἐμεωυτου, σεωυτου, εωυτου, θωυμα, and τρωυμα, 
for ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, θαῦμα, τραῦμα, they, ac- 
cording to tradition, constitute two syllables, od; 
thus, ἐμεωύτοῦ, σεωῦτοῦ, éwitov, θώῦμα, τρωύμα; and 
the analogy of such [onic forms as βασιληΐη, σημήϊον, 
Kris, Rvs, ἠῦτε, ypnis, Μηΐων, seems to add to the 
weight of the traditional orthography. 

Eustath. p. 568. Ἐν δὲ toi ωὐτὸς ἀνήρ, ἤγουν 6 αὐτός, ἰστέ- 
ον ὅτι ἡ ΩΥ δίφθογγος ἐν μιαῖ μὲν λέξει κατὰ διάλυσιν προάγεται διεξο- 
δικῶς, οἷν θωῦμάσιος 6 θαυμάσιος, καὶ ἑωῦτοῦ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἑαυ- 


Tod: ἐν δὲ δυσὶ λέξεσι κέκραται Tat λόγωι τῆς συναιρέσεως. 


§ $8. 


Many words which now appear without the rough 
breathing were once pronounced and written with 
it; as, C. I. n. 8. 71. 139. 170. 451. Atcwros, adxov- 
gia, ἕχω, édmis, Ἱσθμοῖ; KE. E. p. 111. “Α4βδηρῖται, 
“Αγρυλῆθεν, ᾿Αγρυλῆσι, “Αλωπεκῆσι, ἅγαλμα ; A, AA, ite 
56. 57. 58. otxav, ἱκριώσασι, ἱκριώματα, EK, ἑργαζομέ- 


¢ 4 ς / € / «ς / £ A ed 
VOLS, EVKAUTALS, ἐπί, ETLOTUALOV, EVTOS, ὁπισθοφανῆ, ἄγον- 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 65 


τα, ἕχοντα, ἅνδρα, ἑπικρούοντα, ἁνάλωμα, “Iacos, ὡνή- 
ματα, ἑωνήθησαν, ὧπό, és, ἐπιεικής § Tab. Her. ἅρνησις, 
ὡκροσκιρίαι, ἑννέα, ἑνενήκοντα, ἴσος (also ἴσος), ὁκτώ, 
ὁκτάπεδον, ὀγδοήκοντα, ὁκτακατίων. So ἴδιος, ἕτος, ἐνε- 
αυτός, ἵσος, implied in the expressions, C. 1. n. 2339. 
9335, 2347 c. 2448. 3137. καθ᾽ lav, καθ᾽ éros, καθ᾽ 
EVLAUTOD, ἐφ᾽ ἔσηι. So also ἕσταλκα, ἐλπίζω, implied 
in the compounds, C. I. n. 2852, ἀφέσταλκα ; Gru- 
ter, Corp. Inscr. p. τιχχι. ἀφηχλπισμένωι. On the 
other hand, words beginning with the rough 
breathing were often pronounced and written 
Without it; as, C. Lon. 73c. 76. Ti. 147. Lie. 
Ἑστιαίας, ὅσιον, Ελληνοταμίαις, εκάστωι, ὦ, οἱ, ἡ, ais, 
doa, εκατόμβην, ἡμέραι, ἕτερον, εβδόμηι, EKTNL, ενδεκάτηι; 
E. E. p. 111. ἅρμα, εἰστηκότα; Tab. Her. ὄρος, ορι- 
otal, ορίζοντα. So A. Π. n. 56, δωδεκημέρου for δω- 
δεχημέρου. 

Gell. 2,3. Η literam sive illam spiritum magis quam lite- 
ram dici oportet, inserebant eam veteres nostri plerique vocibus 
verborum firmandis roborandisque, ut sonus earum esset vi- 
ridior vegetiorque. Atque id videntur fecisse studio et exem- 
plo linguae Atticae. Satis enim notum est Atticos ix vv, ipo», 
multa itidem alia, citra morem gentium Graeciae ceterarum, 
inspirantis primae literae dixisse. 

When a smooth mute came in contact with the 
rough breathing at the beginning of a word, it was 
changed into its corresponding rough mute, and the 
rough breathing disappeared ; as, C. 1. n. 19 ο, B. 
76. KAOOTI, καθ᾽ ὅτι, KAOEKASTON, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον: 
Tab. Her. ΑΦΕΚΑΤΟΜΠΕΖΔΩ, ἀφ᾽ εκατομπέδω. In 

6 


66 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


order, however, not to disturb the usual orthogra- 
phy of the second word, the Byzantine gramma- 
rians suffered the rough breathing to retain its 
place. 

The rough breathing is never found in connec- 
tion with P in any inscription; thus, in inscriptions 
in which H represents the rough breathing, we 
find, C. 1. n. 74. 138. 141. 160. 167. Ῥηγίνοις, ἀπορ- 
ραίνονται, ἀπορραντήριον, ἀρραβδώτους, Πύρρος ; Tab. 
Her. ἐρρηγείας, ἀρρήκτω. The orthography ps Pps as 
also Op, op, xP, TP, ™p, Kp, Was introduced by the 
Alexandrian grammarians ; in our editions, the or- 
thography 4, $p, xp, TP, mp, Kp 15 not used ; and in 
some of the latest editions, the original orthogra- 
phy pp is employed. According to Priscian, the 
breathing was originally placed after the p; thus, 


ΡΕ: ρ1: 


Sext. adv. Gramm. 1,5. Μόνον δὲ φασὶ τὸ Ρ ἐπιδέχεσθαι ἑκά- 
τερον δασύτητα καὶ Ψιλότητα. 

B. A. 693. Ἐπὶ συμφώνου τίθεται ἑνὸς μόνου τοῦ P ἡ δασεῖα καὶ 
ἡ ψιλή. Ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ ῥώμη καὶ ῥέω τίθεται ἡ δασεῖα - ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ 
papos, ὃ σημαίνει τὸ βρέφος κατὰ τοὺς Αἰολεῖς, ἡ ψιλή, ...... ὅτι 
ἡ Αἰολὶς γλῶττα τὸ ψιλοῦν φιλεῖ... .... Τοῦτο δὲ τὸ Ρ οὐ μόνον κατ᾽ 
> \ a \ , > \ A ΄ Ξε \ vw 5 ©€ 
ἀρχὰς ψιλοῦται καὶ δασύνεται, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὸ μέσον, οἷον τὸ ἔῤῥαπτον" 
τὸ μὲν γὰρ πρῶτον Ψιλοῦται, τὸ δὲ δεύτερον δασύνεται. ... .. Oi δὲ 
ἀρχαῖοι γραμματικοὶ τὸ μὲν μετὰ ψιλοῦ εὑρισκόμενον P ἐψίλουν, τὸ δὲ 
μετὰ δασέος ἐδάσυνον - οἷον τὸ Ατῥῤῥεύς καί κάπῤος ἐψίλουν, τὸ δὲ 

cs > oe cS 3 ’ 
χῥόνος, appos, θῥόνος, ἐδάσυνον. 

Priscian. 1,5, p. 542. Aspiratio ante vocales omnes poni 

? ν 

potest, post consonantes vero quatuor tantummodo, more anti- 
quo Graecorum, C, T, P, R. 





a 


REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 67 


_The rough breathing was used also in the mid- 
dle of words ; as, C. I. n. 26. 160. evodia, Tplnutro- 
δίους ; Tab. Her. τριήμίγυον, ἀνέλόμενος, παρἕξοντι, 
συνἕρξοντι, πενταέτηρίς, ἀνέῶσθαι. So also ποιῆάι, 
pad, βουδα, Doric for ποιῆσαι, paca, βουσόα;:; ταῦς, 
Attic for ταώς. 

According to most ancient grammarians, the 
rough breathing should not be used in the middle 
of a compound proper name ; as, Εὐρύαλος, Φίλιππος, 
not Evpvddos, Φίλἱππος. 

In the form ed LopKe@ (C. Ln. 3137) for ἐπιορκέω, 
the breathing of ὅρκος changes 7 into ¢. 


Athen. 9, 57, p. 397 E. Tads δὲ λέγουσιν Αθηναῖοι, ὥς φησι 
Τρύφων, τὴν τελευταίαν συλλαβὴν περισπῶντες καὶ Sagivortes...... 
Αμήχανον δὲ παρ᾽ Αττικοῖς καὶ Ἴωσιν ἐν τοῖς ὑπὲρ μίαν συλλαβὴν ὀνό- 
μασι τὴν τελευτῶσαν ἀπὸ φωνήεντος ἀρχομένην SaciverOa...... 
Παραλόγως δὲ οἱ Ἀττικοὶ καὶ δασύνουσι καὶ περισπῶσι. The fact is, 
ταώς was originally ταξώς, hence rahws ; compare Latin payo, 
Romaic παγώνι. 

Galen. 5, p. 457, ed. Basil. τὴν δευτέραν συλλαβὴν τοῦ στε- 

n~ A“ > ’ὔ > 4 5 , > \ + 
νυγρῶσαι ψιλοῦντες, ov δασύνοντες, ἀναγνωστέον ἐστί: ov yap ey- 
A ¢ , 5 a ΄ , » > , 
κειται TO ὑγρός ἐν THt λέξει καθάπερ ay τις οἰηθείη. 

Etymol. Magn. Ewwos...... Oi Ἀργεῖοι καὶ Λάκωνες καὶ 
Παμφύλιοι καὶ Ἐρετριεῖς καὶ Ὡρόπιοι ἔνδειαν τοῦ Σ ποιοῦντες δασεῖαν 
χαράττουσι τοῖς ἐπιφερομένοις φωνήεσιν, ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ ποιῆσαι ποι- 
ais A ἃ 4 , “ ἈΝ , « ’ 
nat, καὶ βουσόα Bovoa, καὶ μωσικά μωΐκά. 

Schol. Venet. ad Il. 1,8. Ἐυνέηκε, δασύνεται τὸ Evvén- 

uy] 7 
κεν. 

Ibid. ad Il. 15, 705. Καλης dkvadov..... ἡ δὲ ἁλός 

A 3 “ 4 “Ὁ ὦ ‘ ’ A > 7 A ΄ 
γενικὴ ἐν τηῖ συνθέσει ἐπὶ μὲν κυρίων ψιλὸν ἀποφέρεται τὸ πνεῦμα, 
ἙΕυρύαλος, Αμφίαλος, Αστύαλος, ἐπὶ δὲ ἐπιθετικῶν τὸ ἴδιον τηρεῖ 


mvevpa, ..... Φίλιππος μὲν τῆς μέσης δασυνομένης τὸ προσηγορι- 


68 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


ROD cost Φίλιππος δὲ ψιλῶς 6 Μακεδὼν - καὶ ὠκύαλος μὲν δασέως 
ἡ ναῦς, ψιλῶς δὲ 6 ἀνήρ. Ἐναντίως δὲ 6 Ἣρωδιανός. 

Ibid. ad Il. 24, 285. Ἐξέσίην. ΑΔἈρίσταρχος δασύνει τὴν δευ- 
τέραν συλλαβὴν - παρὰ γὰρ τὸ inwe φησὶ ἐγένετο. 

Β. A. p. 0935. οὐ γὰρ ἁπλῶς τὰ φωνήεντα ἢ ψιλοῦται ἢ δασύ- 
νεται, GAN ὅτε κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς τῶν λέξεων τίθενται. ‘The author of this 
scholium merely shows his ignorance. 

Eustath. p. 150. Ὅτι δὲ παρὰ τοῖς ἀρχαίοις οὐ μόνον τὰ ἀρκτικὰ 
τῶν λέξεων φωνήεντα ἐπνευμάτιζον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ διὰ μέσου ἐν ταῖς 
συλλαβαῖς, ὡμολόγηται ὑπὸ τῶν ἀντιγράφων. 

Id. p. 324. οἱ ἀρχαῖοι καὶ ἐν μέσωι λέξεων ἐπνευμάτιζον τὰ φω- 
νήεντα καὶ τὸ Ρ.... - - Λέγουσι δὲ οἱ παλαιοὶ καὶ ὅτι εἴτε λεκτὸν τὸ 
ἐπὶ τέλους φωνῆεν εἴτε καὶ παρέλκει φυλαττέσθω τὸ πνεῦμα" καὶ ὅτι 
εὕρηται τὸ πάνδρμος δασυνόμενον καὶ TO μελιήἡ δής οἶνος. 

Id. p. 1596. Αγχίάλος ψιλοῖ, φασι, τὴν παραλήγουσαν ὡς 
κύριον, καθὰ καὶ 6 παρὰ τῆς Φαίαξιν Εὐρύάλος. ὋὉ δὲ ἀγχίἁάλος 
τόπος καὶ ἀμφίἁάλος δασύνουσι τὸ μέσον ΓΑλφα κατὰ τοὺς παλαιοὺς " 
οὕτω δὲ καὶ ὁ πλησίἁλος. 

In most of the printed editions of the Greek au- 
thors, the breathing, as also the accent, is placed 
over the second vowel of a diphthong ; as, εἰπεῖν, 
εἵπετο, αἷμα, εἶχον ; but the diphthongs a, ἢν @ take 
these marks over the first vowel; as, ado, "Aida, 
noov, "Hidov, φὠδή, ᾿Ωιδή. In manuscripts, however, 
these marks are sometimes placed over the first 
vowel, sometimes over the second, and sometimes 
over the middle of a diphthong ; as, cas, ἔνχετε, ἐπόι- 
NOEV, ὀυρανόν, κείμενος, ἐποίησεν, ἐἴχετε, τόυτον : and 
when a syllable has a breathing and the circumflex, 
the circumflex is commonly put after the breathing; 
as, ἦλθον, Oikos. 











REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 69 


§ $4. 


In inscriptions, the combinations ITT, ΓΚ, Ix, 


| and MB, MII, Μῷ, are very often written NI, NK, 
| NX, and NB, NII, N4@, respectively; and in those 
| cut before the eighty-sixth Olympiad (B. C. 432), 


N is almost always used for I before a palatal, and 


} for M before a labial; as, C. 1. n. 4. 41. 22. 93. 


Mivewy, “Eveaipos (2), ἐνγύς, ἐνγράψαι ; ibid. 401. 
1001. 107. 2556. ἐνενκαμένου, avavens, ἐπανγέλεται, 
λανχανόντων ; thid. 3. 11. 99. 30. 71. 165. ἀμενφές, 
Ολυνπίωι, Ολυνπίου, λανβάνειν, Κλεόνβροτος, Συνφέρ- 
puos; 1. Β΄. ἡ. 49. Μανψακηνοί ; A. Η. n. 48. Aav- 
πτρεύς. During the Alexandrian and subsequent 
periods, I was generally used for N before a pala- 
tal, and M before a labial. 

The form, C. 1. n. 76. ἀν-ενήνεγκαι, for our av-evn- 
vextat, from ἀναφέρω, ENETKN, retains the nasal y; 
from which it may be inferred that the perfect pas- 
sive of verbs in -yxo, -yyo, -γχω retained the y 
throughout ; as, ἐνήνεγγμαι, ἐνήνεγξαι, ἐνήνεγκται, ἐνη- 
νεγγμένος ; ἐλήλεγγμαι, and so forth; so also verbal 
nouns in -μα, as, φθέγγμα. ‘The omission of the y 
in such cases seems to be of later origin. 

In inscriptions cut after the eighty-sixth Olym- 
piad, N at the end of a word before a palatal was 
often changed into I’; before a labial, it was often 
changed into M; as, C. 1. n. 101. 160. 1052. 84. 
147. 2905. 46. TOY καιρῶν, ay καί, ἐγ κύκλωι, ἐῶγ καί, 


70 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


ἀτέλειαγ καί, TOY γραμματέα, ἱερῶγ χρημάτων, Tay χώ- Ἷ 


ραν; ibid. n. 75. 76. 101. 105. 1052. τῶμ πόλεων, |} 


ἐμ πόλει, ὅταμ περ, ἐστὶμ περί, ἐγλέγειμ Tap αὐτοῦ, | 
τὴμ πόλιν, μὲμ ποθεῖ ; ibid. 124. 160. 75. 170. ἐμ |} 
βουλευτηρίωι, τὸμ βωμόν, τὸμ φόρον, μὲμ ψυχάς. 

We find, also, C. 1. n. 76. 82. 143. Tor royor, 
TON λογιστῶν, TOM μισθώσεων, THY Μυσίαν, for τὸν, 
τῶν, τὴν. Also, C. 1. 11. 3137. 76. cuvpayia, συν- ἢ 
σφραγίζω, συσημαινέσθων; Boeckh, Athen. Nav. p. 
408. παλινλύτων. 

Ev before 3 was often pronounced and written 
Es; as, C. I. n. 87. 147. 171. 2447, b. és Sida, és 
Σάμωι, ἐς Σίγγωι, ἐς σύλωι, ἐς στήληι. We find, also, 
C. I. η. 87, 218. ἐστήληι, εἰστήληι, for ἐν στήληι. 

N movable or ἐφελκυστικόν, is, in inscriptions, — 
often used before a consonant, and as often omitted — 
before a vowel; as, C. .. 76. 139. ἐγραμμάτευε, Ev- 


/ 5 5 A δ n ar 7 a 
melOns ; εἶπε ἀποδοῦναι ; ἐδοξεν τη βουληΐ ; ταμίασι ois. 


§ 3. 


Ex before B, 4, A, Μ, F, was often pronounced 
and written Ey; ΟἹ. n. 157. 1570,a. 139. 525. 
175.2168; 0. ey Βενδιδείων, ἐγ Διονυσίων, ἐγδόσεις, εγ- 
δότω, ey Δέσβου, ἐγ λιμένος, ἐγ Μεγάρων, ἐγ Mupivns ; 
Boeckh, Athen, Nav. p. 453. 450, ἐγχυθέντων, ἐγ Mup- 
ρινούτης ; Tab. Her, ἐγεηληθίωντι. Before 3, it was 
often written Ey; as, C. 1. n. 147. ἐχ Σάμου. We 
find, also, C. I. ἃ. 789. 2907, 2347, c. 3049. e£ay- 





i 





| 


. 


REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. χὰ 


| γιέων, ἐξαλαμῖνος, ἐξύρου, ἐξυβριτίας, for ἐκ Σουνιέων, 
ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος, ἐκ Σύρου, ἐκ Συβριτίας. Also, C. 1 
ἢ. 158, A. ἐξ Ῥηνείας ; E. E. p. 127. ἐξ Ῥόδου. 


86. 


The expressions, εἰς στήλας, τὰς στήλας, Were 


also written εἰστήλας, ταστήλας, Without the ¢ of 
εἰς, τάς. (C. 1. ἡ. 93. 108. 3044.) 


§ 37. 


Not unfrequently a word was written with a sin- 


| gle consonant where commonly that consonant was 
| doubled ; as, C. 1. ἢ. 2. 8. 11. 16. 160. Ἱπομέδων, 
| Odpor, Προκονησίου, ἀχάλοις, ar, ἐγραμένωι, Τυράν, 
᾿ἀράβδωτα; EE. E. 1-21. Θαρυπτόλεμος ; Millingen, 
| plat. xxiii. Σαφώ for Yardd (Σαφφώ). On the 
other hand, the later Greeks often wrote two con- 
'sonants where only one was originally used ; as, 


Ο. 1 ἢ. 213. Εὐριππίδης; E. E. p. 247. Πόλλις, Ιοῦχ- 


! 7. / val / >? 
| Xos, AxvrAras, Aowvia, Μοῦππος, Tittios, Ουολουσσια- 


{ / / 
_ vos, Καισσία. 


> was often doubled before a consonant; most 


᾿ commonly before T; as, C. 1. n. 13. 25. 166. 1638. 


1306. 879. 2298, Αρισστόδαμος, Αρισστογείτων, Te- 


| 7 ΜΝ / 
λέσστας, Αρισστοφάνης, ἄρίσστον, σεβασστοὸν, Α4βασ- 


σκάντωι, κόσσμου, Ασσκληπιόδωρος, Μοσσχίων ἘΣ 
»}. 247. ᾿σσκληπιάδης 3 A. Η. n. 31. ἀρισστεύων. 
The later Greeks sometimes doubled a rough 


72 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. . 


mute in the middle of a word; as, C. 1. n. 427. 
1927. 2169, 2211,6; vol. 2, p. 1029. Adduavos, 
Σάφφου, κάθθεσαν, Κλεοθθίς, for Αππιανός, Σάπφου, 
κάτθεσαν, Κλεοτθίς ; ibid. n. 3469, 286. Addiov, Οφφια- 
vos, for Ἀππίου, Ormiavos; E. E. p. DAT, Σαφφώ, 
"Addn, for Σαπφώ, "Armn. 1 
Even Z was sometimes doubled; as, C. Ln. 
2131. ὁ Ζαζζοῦς, a man’s name. 
A liquid or Σ΄ was often doubled at the beginning | 
of a word for the metre. Thus, in the following 
elegiac pentameter, A is doubled after ὑπό; C. 1. 
n. 2169. Τρισσὸν ὑπολλυκάβαν Tpappatixos τελέω. 
So, Il. 17, 463. AAN οὐχ ηἵρει φῶτας ὍΤΕΣΣΕΥ- 
AITO διώκειν, Where ‘OTESSEYAITO has incor- 
rectly been divided ὅτ᾽ ἐσσεύαιτο ; it is now edited 


“ 7 
: OTE CEVALTO. 


§ 38. 


Crasis and elision are, in metrical inscrip- 
tions, very often left to pronunciation; as, ( 1. 
ἡ, 10. 85. 173, 426, 456,a. 749. 808. 1001. 1582. 
2055, b. 


To aFuTouv λιθο εμι avdpiac καὶ TO σφέλασ 
ταὐτοῦ λίθου εἴμ᾽ ἀνδριὰς καὶ τὸ σφέλας 

φυλὴν κεκροπίδον ἐεργων εδρασε ἀγαθα 
φυλὴν Κεκροπιδῶν ἔργωι ἔδρασ᾽ ἀγαθά 

TOLWVOE aVOPWY ἡ πολίσ οπποταν aUTLO ἀμαρτὴν 


a ΑΙ ἀ.5 a ς , c , > Cus Ψ 
τοιῶνδ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἡ πόλις ὁππόταν αὖτις ἁμάρτηι 

















REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 73 


 βουλὴσ pe apecac ψηφοσ εστησε ενθαδε 

γενουσ τε EKATL καὶ APETNT οσὴ VEw 
βουλῆς μ᾽ Ἀρείας ψῆφος ἔστησ᾽ ἐνθάδε 
γένους θ᾽ ἕκατι κἀρετῆς ὅση νέωι 

φραδαισι νυμῴφων το ἀντρον εξηργασατο 
φραδαῖσι νυμφῶν τἄντρον ἐξειργάσατο 

εἰμι δε αριστοκλὴσ πειραιευσ Trac δὲ μενωνοσ 
εἰμὶ δ᾽ Δριστοκλῆς Iletpaeds, παῖς δὲ Μένωνος 

ουσαν καὶ KATA γὴσ Kat τιμήσω σε αχρι av ἕω 
οὖσαν καὶ κατὰ γῆς καὶ τιμήσω σ᾽ ἄχρι ἂν ζῶ 

σωμα πνοὴν oe alOnp ἔλαβεν οσπερ εδωκεν 
σῶμα" πνοὴν δ᾽ αἰθὴρ ἔλαβεν ὅσπερ ἔδωκεν 

etxova τηνδὲ ἀνεθηκε φορυστασ παισ ο τρίακοσ 
εἰκόνα τήνδ᾽ ἀνέθηκε Φορύστας παῖς ὁ Τρίακος 

κείμεθα και ευσεβεων εν σκίεροισ θαλαμοισ 


κείμεθα κεὐσεβέων ἐν σκιεροῖς θαλάμοις 


Even in manuscripts crasis is sometimes left to 
pronunciation ; as, ἐπεὶ ov, μὴ ov, ἢ ov, ἢ εἰσόκεν, Evu- 


Ϊ Ν / 
arias ἀνδρειφόντηι, δὴ ἀφνειότατος, μὴ ἄλλος, εἰλαπίνη 


ἠέ, ἀσβέστωι οὐδ. 
§ 39. 


The dative singular of the first two declensions 


| was formed by annexing I to the root, without any 


further change; that is, it ended in -ai, -oi, which 


were contracted into -a:, τού. In process of time 


the radical vowels (a, 0) were lengthened ; that is, 


the endings became -a, τῆι, τω. The adverbial 
datives πάλαι, χαμαί, οἴκοι, such adverbs of place 


Ἵ 


74 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


as ποῖ, Φαληροῖ, Ισθμοῖ, and the dative of feminines 
in -w or -ws of the second declension, are relics of the 
original pronunciation and orthography of this case. 
In inscriptions cut after the introduction of 2, the 
original form of the dative of the second declension 
is sometimes used; as, C. 1. η. 99. 1565. 185. 837. 
2556. tad Ολυμπίοι, tot δάμοι, βωμοῖ, Σωσίνοι, ἐν Πρι- 
ανσίο. Add to these the Beeotic datives Πλαύχαε, 
Διωνύσοε, that is, Πλαύχαι, Διωνύσοι, already men- 
tioned (§ 27). And if short A could be distin- 
guished from long 4, it is more than probable that — 
we should find, in inscriptions, more such datives | 
as πάλαι, χαμαί. Further, the Boeotic endings of 
the dative, -7, τυ, come not from the common form 
-a or -ἡ, τῳ, but from the original -as, τοῦ. 

In inscriptions belonging to the first three centu- 
ries of our era, the accusative singular of the third | 
declension sometimes ends in -av; as, E. E. p. 248. 
ἄνδραν, γυναῖκαν, μητέραν, στυλλεῖδαν. This ending, 
although apparently a barbarism, is a relic of the 
original form of the accusative of the third declen- 
sion. (Compare the Latin -em, as homin-em, 
mulier-em, matr-em.) 

The accusative plural of all the declensions is 
formed by annexing & to the accusative singular. 
Thus, in Cretan inscriptions we find, C. 1. n. 3050. © 
3058. TOUS, πρειγευτάνς, for TOUS, πρειγευτάς. The . 
Doric accentuation of the accusative plural of the — 
third declension shows that even in this declension — 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 75 


the original ending was avs ; as, πτώκας, Doric for 
πτῶκας, from πτώξ. 

The contracted ending of the nominative dual 
of neuters in -os of the third declension was also 
-w; as, C. I. n. 150. τὼ σκέλει, τὼ ζεύγει, from σκέ- 
Ros, ζεῦγος. 


§ 40. 


The endings of the subjunctive were originally 
the same as those of the indicative ; in process of 
time, the connecting vowels ε, o were lengthened 
into 7, ὦ, in the subjunctive. The Epic dialect 
retains the original form of the subjunctive in such 
forms as φθίεται, ἴομεν, ἐρύξομεν, to which we may 
add the subjunctive σκεδάννυσι, σκεδάννυται, κτίννυμεν, 
κεῖται, and (C. I. n. 2008) καταδέχεται. In inscrip- 
tions cut long after the introduction of the vowel H, 
the ending -EI is often used for -HI in the third 
person singular of the subjunctive active and second 
aorist passive; as, C. 1. n. 3044. 2008. 93. 2360. 
2953. ὃς ἂν κατάξει, ἐκκόψει, ποιήσει, ἀναψηφίζει, 
ἐξέλθει, εἴπει, ἐπιψηφίσει, ei, δόξει, ἀποκρύψει, ἐπάρει. 
This peculiarity is common to all the dialects, and 
we cannot persuade ourselves that it is merely a 
relic of the old orthography ; compare -εἰ for -7 in 
the second person singular of the indicative passive 
and middle ; as, ὄψει, βούλει, οἴει. 


76 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§ 41. 


It is more than probable that originally the 
Greeks, in imitation of their masters, the Phoe- 
nicians, wrote from right to left. (Compare C. I. 
n. 31. 33. 35. 36. 37.) Afterwards they adopted 
the βουστροφηδόν method, that is, they wrote the 
odd lines from right to left, and the even ones from 
left to right. (C. f. n. 1. 9. 23. 27. 40.) Some- 
times, however, the odd lines ran from left to right. 
(C. I. n. 9. 22. 34, 39.) Finally they adopted the 
method of writing from left to right. 

Herod. 2, 36. Τράμματα γράφουσι καὶ λογίζονται ψήφοισι 
Ἕλληνες μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀριστερῶν ἐπὶ τὰ δεξιὰ φέροντες τὴν χεῖρα, 
Αἰγύπτιοι δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν δεξιῶν ἐπὶ τὰ ἀριστερὰ, καὶ ποιεῦντες ταῦτα 
αὐτοὶ μέν φασι ἐπὶ δεξιὰ ποιέειν, Ἕλληνας δὲ ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερά. 

Pausan. 5,17,3. Τῶν δὲ ἐπὶ ryt λάρνακι ἐπιγράμματα ἔπεστι 
τοῖς πλείοσι γράμμασι τοῖς ἀρχαίοις γεγραμμένα " καὶ τὰ μὲν ἐς εὐθὺ 
αὐτῶν ἔχει, σχήματα δὲ ἄλλα τῶν γραμμάτων βουστροφηδὸν καλοῦ- 
σιν Ἕλληνες - τὸ δὲ ἐστὶ τοιόνδε - ἀπὸ τοῦ πέρατος τοῦ ἔπους ἐπι- 
στρέφει τῶν ἐπῶν τὸ δεύτερον, ὥσπερ ἐν διαύλου δρόμωι. 

The following select inscriptions and portions of 
inscriptions are subjoined to this chapter, for the 
sake of illustrating the progress of Greek orthogra- 
phy. | 

C. I. n. 11. Elean (4olic); written about 

Β. C 576. a FpaTpa TOLp FaxXetotc : Kat τοιίσ epFa 

οιοισ TUYMAYLA K Ea EKATOV Ἑετεα : ἄρχοι δε κα TOL at 

δὲ τί deou: alte Εεποσ ate Fapyov συνεᾶν Kk aranrotc : 
5 Ta T AN Kat TAP πόλεμο: AL δὲ μα συνεαν : ταλαντον 


K apyupo: αποτινοίαν : τοῦ Ot ολυνπίιοι 2 TOL καδαλε 





10 


10 


10 


REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. te 


μενοι : λατρείομενον : αὐ δὲ Tip Ta ypadea : Tat καδα 
AEOLTO: alTe Ἑετασ αὐτε τέλεστα : ALTE δαμοσ: €VT 


eT LapOl K EVEN OLTO TOLWTAUT EYPAHMEVOL 


The same in modern dress. A Fpdrpa τοῖρ FaXeious καὶ τοῖς 
HpFaoios. Συμμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἔκατον Férea, ἄρχοι δέ ka τω. Ai δέ 
τι δέοι aire Ῥέπος aire Ἐάργον σύνεαν κ᾽ ἀλλάλοις τά τ᾽ ἄλλ᾽ καὶ 
map πολέμω - Ai δὲ μὰ σύνεαν, τάλαντον κ᾿ ἀργύρω ἀποτίνοιαν Tat 
Al Ολυμπίωι τοὶ καδαλήμενοι λατρειόμενον - Ai δέ tip τὰ γράφεα 
tai καδαλέοιτο, aire Féras aire τέλεστα aire δᾶμός ἐντ᾽, ἐπιάρωι 
κ᾽ ἐνέχοιτο Twi ᾽νταῦτ᾽ ἐγραμμένωι. 

Translation. ‘H ρήτρα τοῖς Ηλείοις καὶ τοῖς ἩἫραιεῦσι. Συμ- 
μαχία ἂν εἴη ἑκατὸν ἔτη, ἄρχοι δ᾽ ἂν τωῖδε. Ei δέ τι δέοι εἴτε ἔπος 
εἴτε ἔργον, συνεῖεν ἂν ἀλλήλοις τά τε ἄλλα καὶ περὶ πολέμου. Ei 
δὲ μὴ συνεῖεν, τάλαντον ἂν ἀργύρου ἀποτίνοιεν Twi Διὶ Ολυμπίωι 
οἱ καταδηλούμενοι λατρευόμενον. Ei δέ τις τὰ γράμματα τηῖδε κατα- 
δηλοῖτο, εἴτε ἔτης εἴτε τελεστὴς εἴτε δῆμός ἐστι, ἐφιέρωι ἂν ἐνέ- 
χοιτο Twt ἐνταῦθα γεγραμμένωι. 

The covenant of the Eleans and Hereans. There shall be 
an alliance for a hundred years, and it shall begin this 
year. And if it shall become necessary, either in word or 
deed, they shall come together and deliberate as well about 
other matters as about war. But if they shall not come 
together, those who shall thus violate the covenant shall pay 
one talent of silver to be devoted to Zeus Olympius. And if 
any one shall destroy the letters hereon inscribed, whether he 
be a private citizen, or a magistrate, or a commoner, he shall 
be liable to the sacred fine here mentioned. 


The forms τοῖρ, roi, ἐντί, are Dorisms. The dialect of the 


Arcadians and Eleans was essentially AZolic. Strab. 7, p. 514 
(333). Hence the absence of the rough breathing in this in- 
scription. 


Line 1. HpFaoios, from HpFaoios, formed from HpFda (that 


is, “Hpaia) after the analogy of Tedwios (originally TEAOIOS) 


aed 


78 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


from Téda; that is, the radical vowel a becomes o, and then 1 


the adjective follows the analogy of ἠοῖος or ἠωῖος, παππωῖος. 

Lines 2. 8. τωῖ, rat, Boeckh writes roi, rai, which, he says, 
are the same as τοδί, ταδί. But as roi, ταῦ have no existence in 
the language, except in the Romaic forms rov-ro-id (in three syl- Ὁ 
lables), ἐ-κει-νο-ιά (in four syllables), we prefer ri, rai, although 
the syntax is rather harsh. 

Lines 4. Ὁ. σύνεαν, ἀποτίνοιαν, formed from συνείησαν., ἀποτί- 
νοισαν. For the omission of ε in σύνεαν, compare λαχόην, AXolic 
for λαχοίην. 

Line Ἵ. τοὶ xadadnpevor, present participle for καδδαλήμενοι, 
from κατὰ and δήλημαι ALolic for δηλέομαι, like δίζημαι ; compare 
κάβασι, κάπετον, Doric for κατάβηθι, κατέπεσον. 

In the copy which the engraver had before him the words 
were probably arranged τάλαντον k apyvpo αἀποτινοιαν τοι καδαλε- 
μενοι τοι δι ολυνπιοι λατρειομενον 5 his eye, however, caught the 
second ra, and accordingly he proceeded as far as the end of 
ολυνπιοι, When he discovered the omission of tou καδαλεμενοι 5 
hence the confused arrangement of this sentence. Boeckh 
writes tat καδαλημένωι, making’ it agree with Aw; but as the 
perfect never omits the syllabic augment, this dative must be 
in the present ; and as the present of this deponent verb is 
always used actively, we are compelled to make καδαλήμενοι the 
subject of ἀποτίνοιαν, and refer it to the delinquents. 

Line 10. ἐπιάρωι, from ἐπίαρος, compounded of ἐπί and iapds 
fBolic for ἱαρός, ἱερός. 





τωῖ vravt, for rat ἐνταῦτα. 


C. 1. n. 3. Melan (Doric) ; written before B. C. 
A56. 


Tat διοσ ἐκπηαντοι δεκσαι TOO ἀμενπηεσ ἀγαλμα 
σοι Yap εἐπευκηομενοσ TOUT ετέλεσσε γροφων 
Παῖ Διὸς, Ἐκφάντωι δέξαι τόδ᾽ ἀμεμφὲς ἄγαλμα. 
Σοὶ γὰρ ἐπευχόμενος τοῦτ᾽ ἐτέλεσσε γρόφων. 
Son of Zeus, accept of Ekphantos this faultless gift ; for 
praying to thee he sculptured this. 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 79 


C. 1. n. 4. Petilian (Doric) ; written before B. C. 
456. θεοσ . τυχα - caotic . διδοτι - ciKaWLAL - ταν Fou 
κιαν - και τάλλα - TaVTA - δαμιοργοσ - παραγορασ - προ 
ἕενοι - μινκον - ἀρμοξιδαμοσ - αγαθαρχοσ . ovatac . ert 
Κοροσ 

Θεὸς, Τύχα - Σαῶτις δίδωτι Σικαινίαι τὰν Ἑοικίαν καὶ τἄλλα πάντα. 
Δαμιωργὸς Παραγόρας > Πρόξενοι Μίνκων, “Αρμοξίδαμος, Aydbapyos, 
Ονατᾶς, Ἐπίκωρος. 

Θεὸς, Τύχη. Σαῶτις δίδωσι Σικαινίαι τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ τἄλλα πάντα. 
Δημιουργὸς Παραγόρας + Πρόξενοι Μίγκων, “Appogidapos, Αγάθαρχος; 
Ovaras, Ἐπίκουρος. 


God, Fortune. Saotis gives to Sikainia the house and all 
the other things. Paragoras, Magistrate: Minkon, Harmozxida- 
mos, Agatharkhos, Onatas, Epikouros, Patrons. 


C. 1. n. 16. Olympian (Doric); written B. C. 
489. ηιαρον o δεινομενεοσ καὶ Tor συρακοσίοι τοι δὲ 
τυραν απὸ κυμασ 

Ἱάρων ὁ Δεινομένεος καὶ τοὶ Συρακόσιοι Twi Ai Τυρράν᾽ ἀπὸ Κύμας. 

Ἱέρων ὃ Δεινομένους καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι tat Διὶ Τυρρήν᾽ ἀπὸ Κύμης. 

Mieron, the son of Deinomenes, and the Syracusans dedicate 
to Zeus these Tyrrhenian spoils taken at Cume. 


C. 1. n. 29. Argive (Doric); written before B. C. 
456. ταργίει)οι avebev τοι διΕι Tov φορινθοθεν 

Τἀργεῖοι ἀνέθεν τωῖ Διξὶ τῶν Κορινθόθεν. 

Οἱ Ἀργεῖοι ἀνέθεσαν Twi Διὶ τῶν Κορινθόθεν. 


The Argives dedicated to Zeus this helmet from the Corin- 
thian spoils. 


C.I.n. 10. Delian (lonic) ; written before B.C. 
456, (τὴο aFuto λιθο ee avdpiac καὶ το σφελασ 


80 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Tod αὐτοῦ λίθου εἰμὶ ἀνδριὰς καὶ τὸ oédas, or rather, Tavrod 
λίθου εἴμ᾽ ἀνδριὰς καὶ τὸ σφέλας, an iambic trimeter acatalectic. 


I the statue and base are made out of one stone. 


C. I. n. 89. Milesian (Ionic); written before 
B.C. A456. ερμησιαναξ ἡμεασ aveOnkev.... τωπολλωνι 
ἝἙρμησιάναξ ἡμέας ἀνέθηκεν... .. τὠπόλλωνι. 


Hermesianax dedicated us..... to Apollo. 


C. 1. n. 3044. Teian (Lonic); written before B.C. 


A456. οστισ : τηιων : ε(υθ)υνων ἡ αιἱσυ(μ)νητὴηι : 


(απειθοι)η ἡ εἐπανισταιτο : (τωι) αν (συμ)νητηι : amor 
λυσθαι : και αυτον : καὶ γένοσ : τὸ Κεινο : . .. .. O00 ἂν 
ταστηλασ : εν ηίσιν : ἡ παρὴ : γεγραπται : ἢ καταξει : 
n φοινικηία : exkoe(L) : ἡ αφανεασ : ποιήσει : κενον 
απολλυσθαι : καὶ αὑτον καὶ γενοσ 

Ὅστις Τηΐων εὐθύνωι ἢ αἰσυμνήτηι ἀπειθοίη ἢ ἐπανίσταιτο Twit αἷ- 
συμνήτηι, ἀπόλλυσθαι καὶ αὐτὸν καὶ γένος τὸ κείνου... ... “Os ἂν 
τὰς στήλας, ἐν ηἷσιν ἡ map) γέγραπται, ἢ κατάξηι ἢ φοινικήϊα ἐκκόψηι 


A 3 ᾽΄ ὔ ΄“ 5 6 A 3 ΑΝ 4A ’΄ 
ἢ ἀφανέας ποιήσηι, κεῖνον ἀπόλλυσθαι καὶ αὐτὸν καὶ γένος. 


C. I. η. 33. Attic; written before B. C. 456. τον 
αθενεθεν αθλον εμι 

Τῶν Αθήνηθεν ἄθλων εἰμί. 

I am one of the prizes obtained at Athens. 


C. I. n. 22; A. H. n. 7. Attic ; written before 


B. C. 456. αρχενεοσ rode o(ewa) exter evyvo nodot a 
γαθοκλῴ ει) 
Ἀρχένεως τόδε σῆμα ἔστησ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὁδωῖ Ἀγαθοκλεῖ. 


Arkhenaos erected this monument, near the road, to Agatho- 
kles. 





REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 81 


ie C.L. n. 170, line 5. Attic; written about B. C. 
Ε 480. 
ailep pew φσυχασ υπεδεχσατο co.... 
TOVOE ποτειδαίασ αμῴφι πυλασ ελ.... 
εχθρον ὃ ot μεν exoot ταφο μεροσ η.... 
τείχοσ πίστοτατεν NEeATLO εθεντ.... 
ανδρασ μεμ πολισ nede ποθει και ὃ.... 
προσθε ποτειδαιασ nou θανον eu προ.... 
παίδεσ αθεναιον φσυχασ ὃ ay....ppo.... 
oes XOAVT APETEV καὶ TAT.... υκλ,.... 
Αἰθὴρ μὲν ψυχὰς ὑπεδέξατο, σω.... 
Τῶνδε Ποτειδαίας ἀμφὶ πύλας ελ.... 
Ἐχθρῶν δ᾽ οἱ μὲν ἔχουσι τάφου μέρος, η.... 
Τεῖχος πιστοτάτην ἑλπίδ᾽ ἔθεντ.... 


“Avdpas μὲν πόλις ἥδε ποθεῖ καὶ ὃ.... 


Πρόσθε Ποτειδαίας οἱ θάνον ἐν προ.. 


Παῖδες Αθηναίων - ψυχὰς δ᾽ ἀν... .ρρο... 


bee | \ \ 
τ + Gavr ἀρετὴν. kai wWaT.... UKAX.... 


C. [. n. 76. Attic; written about B. C. 414. 
(εδ)οχσεν Tex Borer καὶ Tor δεμοι κεκροπισ εἐπρυτανεὺε 
μνεσιθεοσσ εἰγ)γραμματευε εὐπειθεσ εἐπεστατε καλλιασ 
εἰπε amrodovat Toc θεοισ Ta χρεματα Ta οφέλομενα 
εἐπειδεὲ TEL αθεναίαι Ta τρισχίλια ταλαντί(α) avevevey 
KTal ἐσ πολιν na εφσεφιστο νομίσματοσ ηἠεμεδ(α)πο 
5 αποδι(δοὴναι de ato τον χρεματον a eo αποδοσιν 
εστιν τοισ θεοῖσ εφσεφισμ(ε) va Ta τε παρα τοισ ελλε 
νοταμιαισ οντὰ νυν καὶ ταλλα a εστι τουτον (τ)ὴον χρε 
ματον Kat Ta εκ τεσ δεκατεσ επειδαν πραθει 
"Ἔδοξεν τηῖ βουληΐῖ καὶ τωῖ δήμωι - Κεκροπὶς emputdveve, Μνησί- 


Geos ἐγραμμάτευε, Ἐὐπείθης ἐπεστάτει, Καλλίας εἶπε" Arrodovvat 





82 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


“ “ A . 

τοῖς θεοῖς τὰ χρήματα τὰ ὀφειλόμενα, ἐπειδὴ THt Αθηναίαι τὰ τρισ- 
ΚΕ ΤΣ, , ς 

χίλια τάλαντα ἀνενήνεγκται ἐς πόλιν ἃ ἐψήφιστο νομίσματος ἡμεδα- 
5 ποῦ. ΑἈποδιδόναι δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν χρημάτων ἃ ἐς ἀπόδοσίν εστιν τοῖς 
θεοῖς ἐψηφισμένα, τά τε παρὰ τοῖς “Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα νῦν καὶ 
2, oe, ΔΑ ’ ΄“ , A \ 5 ~ 4 5 A 
τἄλλα ἅ ἐστι τούτων τῶν χρημάτων καὶ τὰ ἐκ τῆς δεκάτης ἐπειδὰν 


πραθηϊ. 


C. I. n. 147. Attic; written B. C. 405. αθεναιοι 


ανέλοσαν emt YAAVKLTTTO APYOVTOT καὶ ETL TET Boreo εἰ 
κλεγενεσ ἠαλαιίευσ προ(τοσ) εγραμματευε ταμίαι NLEepoy 
χρέματον τεσ αθεναιασ καλλίστρατοσ μαραθονιοσ καὶ 
χσυναρχο(ν)τεσ παρεδοσαν ex τον ἐπετειον φσεφισαμενο 
To δεμὸ ETL τεσ αἰαντιδοσ προτεσ πρυτανευοσεσ ηε(λλε) 
νοταμιαισ παρεδοθε καλλιμαχοι ηαγνοσιοι πρασιυτέλιδει 
ἐκάριει ηνπποίσ σύτοσ εδοθε αθεναιασ πολ(ιαδ)οσ.... 

Αθηναῖοι ἀνήλωσαν ἐπὶ Τλαυκίππου ἄρχοντος καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς βουλῆς nt 
Κλειγένης ᾿Αλαιεὺς πρῶτος ἐγραμμάτευε + ταμίαι ἱερῶν χρημάτων τῆς — 
Αθηναίας Καλλίστρατος Μαραθώνιος καὶ ξυνάρχοντες παρέδοσαν ἐκ τῶν 
ἐπετείων, ψηφισαμένου τοῦ δήμους Ἐπὶ τῆς Αἰαντίδος πρώτης πρυτα- 
νευούσης “EhAnvotapias παρεδόθη, Καλλιμάχωι ᾿Αγνουσίωι, Πρασιτε- 
λίδηι Ἱκαριεῖ, ἵπποις σῖτος ἐδόθη Αθηναίας ἸΤολιάδος .. .. 


Ο. f..n.150,B,:hine 29. Aihie; written τ 


393. ταδὲ ev τῶι οπισθοδομων ex tho κιβωτο THE 
βραυρωνι(ασ n)v ὑππικοσ Kexpuparoc εχηνια ἕενοτιμοσ 
Kapkwo ἀνεθηκε εἰν ετ)ερωι κιβωτίων (ε)ιρηνη ἐλεφαντινὴ 
καταχρυσοσ εν κιβωτι(ωι ἡλ)ὴω δυο υποδερισ διοπων δυο 
ζευγε Tavta υὑποξυλα κατακεχ(ρυσωμε)να 

Τάδε ἐν τωῖ ὀπισθοδόμωι ἐκ τῆς κιβωτοῦ τῆς Βραυρωνίας ἦν * ἱππικὸς ἷ 
κεκρύφαλος, ἐχήνια" Ξενότιμος Καρκίνου ἀνέθηκε. Ἐν ἑτέρωι κιβω- 
τίωι, Ἑἰϊρήνη ἐλεφαντίνη κατάχρυσος. Ἐν κιβωτίωι, ἥλω δύο, ὑποδερὶς; 3 


, ’, ’ a 
διόπων δύο ζεύγει, ταῦτα ὑπόξυλα κατακεχρυσωμένα..... 

















REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 83 


C.I. n. 221. Aitic; written B. Ὁ, 330. λυσι 
κρατησ λυσιθειδου κικκυνευσ ἐχορήγει ἀκαμαντισ παίδων 
ενικα θεων ηυλει λυσιαδησ αθηναιοσ εδιδασκε ευαινετοσ 
ἤρχε 

Λυσικράτης Λυσιθείδου Κικκυνεὺς ἐχορήγει, Ἀκαμαντὶς παίδων ἐνίκα, 


Θέων ηὔλει, Λυσιάδης Αθηναῖος ἐδίδασκε, Ἑὐαίνετος ἦρχε. 


C. I. n. 124. Attic; written about B. C. 150. 


ETL διονυσιου αρχοντοσ του μετα παραμονον €7Tl THT 
αἰαντιδοσ εβδομησ πρυτανειασ ἡ λαμιοσ τιμουχου pap 
νουσίοσ εγραμματευεν γαμηλίωνοσ ογδοη ἰστάμενου ογδοη 
To πρυτανειασ βουλὴ εμ βουλευτηρίωι των προέδρων 
εἐπεψηφισεν στρατοφων στρατοκλεουσ σουνίευσ και συν 
προεδροι εδοξεν Ter βουλει 

Ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἄρχοντος τοῦ μετὰ Παράμονον ἐπὶ τῆς Αἰαντίδος 
ἑβδόμης πρυτανείας, ni Λάμιος Τιμούχου Ῥαμνούσιος ἐγραμμάτευεν, 
Ταμηλιῶνος ὀγδόηι ἱσταμένου, ὀγδόηι τῆς πρυτανείας, βουλὴ ἐν βουλευ- 
τηρίωι " τῶν προέδρων ἐπεψήφισεν Στρατοφῶν Στρατοκλέους Σουνιεὺς 
καὶ συμπρόεδροι + ἔδοξεν τηῖ βουληῖ. 

C. 1. η. 477. Attic ; written a few years before 
Christ. 0 dnuoo aro των δοθεισων δωρεων ὑπο γαιου 
ἰουλίου καισαροσ θεου καὶ αὐτοκρατοροσ καίσαροσ θεου 
υἱου σεβαστου αθηναι apynyeti(d)e στρατηγουντοσ emt 
τουσ οπλιτασ εὐκλεουσ μαραθωνιου του και διαδεξαμενου 
τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν UTEP TOU πατροσ ἠρωδου του καὶ πρεσβευ 
σαντοσ €7bl apXovToe VLKLOU TOU σαραπίιῶνοσ αθμονεωσ 

Ὃ δῆμος ἀπὸ τῶν δοθεισῶν δωρεῶν ὑπὸ Taiov Ιουλίου Καίσαρος 
θεοῦ καὶ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος θεοῦ υἱοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Αθηναῖ ἀρχηγέ- 
τιδι, στρατηγοῦντος ἐπὶ τοὺς ὁπλίτας Ἑὐκλέους Μαραθωνίου τοῦ καὶ 
διαδεξαμένου τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν ὑπὲρ τοῦ πατρὸς Ἡρώδου τοῦ καὶ πρε- 


σβεύσαντος. Ἐπὶ ἄρχοντος Νικίου τοῦ Σαραπίωνος Αθμονέως. 


84 REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 


C.I. n. 2572. Found in Crete (Aftic) ; written 
A, 1). 108. αυτοκρατορι καίσαρι θεου vepBa vim vepova 
τραίανω σεβαστω ἀρίστω (γε)ρμ(α)νικω δακικω ἀρχίερει 
μεγίστω δημαρχίικὴσ εξουσιασ τὸ La ὑπάτω TO (ε) πατρι 
πατριδοσ τω TNT οἰικουμενησ KTLOTH Χ(υ)ττιων ἡ πολισ 
δια πρωτοκοσμου βαναξιβουλου κ(ω)μαστα το β 

Αὐτοκράτορι Καίσαρι θεοῦ Νέρβα υἱωῖ, Νερούαι Tpaiavwit Σεβαστωῖ, 
ἀρίστωι, Τερμανικωῖ, Δακικωῖ, ἀρχιερεῖ μεγίστωι; δημαρχικῆς ἐξουσίας 
τὸ IA, ὑπάτωι τὸ E, πατρὶ πατρίδος, Tat τῆς οἰκουμένης κτίστηι, AvT- 


τίων ἡ πόλις διὰ Πρωτοκόσμου Βαναξιβούλου Κωμάστα τὸ Β. 


42. 





The following specimens of the orthography of 
manuscripts are taken chiefly from Montefaucon’s 


Palaeographia Graeca. 


Codex Alexandrinus. Maxapioc ἀνὴρ oc οὐκ erro 
ρευθη ev βουλὴ ἀσεβων Kat εν οδω αμαρτωλων οὐκ ECT 
Kat emt καθεδρα λοιμὼν οὐκ εκαθισεν αλλ ἡ εν τω νομω 
κυ To θέλημα αὐτου καὶ εν τω νομω αὐτου μελετήσει 
ημερασ Kal νυκτοσ Kat EcTat wo το ξυλον TO πεφυτευμενον 
παρα tac διεξοδουσ των voaTwY ο τον καρπὸν αὐτου ow 
σει εν καίρω αὐτου καὶ TO φυλλον aVTOUV οὐκ ἀπορρυήσε 


Tal. 


Seventh Century. διὰ τὴν ἀσθενίαν tno σαρκοσ 
ὕμων ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μελη ὑμῶν δοῦλα TH 
ἀκαθαρσία καὶ τη ἀνομία. 

OTL ἡ πιστισ υμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλω τῶ κοσμω" 


, 7 > \ ς Ὁ 7 2 A / 
μάρτισ yap μου ἐστὶν ὁ θσ ὦ λλατρένω EV TO πνὶ μου. 














REMARKS ON ORTHOGRAPHY. 85 


Eighth Century. τοῦ ἡρώδου ἰδοὺ ἄγγελοσ κυ κατ᾽ 
ὄναρ φαίνεται τῶ Lwond. εν αὐγυπτω λέγων. 

τῷ καιρῶ εκεινω ἤλθεν ὁ to καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰσ 

Ν a / Ἂ Ν 3 “ 4 “ Ν 
τὴν ἴουδαίαν γὴν καὶ ἐκεῖ διέτριβεν μετ αυτῶὼν καὶ εβα- 
πτηΐζεν. 

Ninth and Tenth Centuries. μακαριοσ avnp oo οὐκ 
επορευθὴ ev βουλὴ ἀσεβων καὶ εν 060 αμαρτωλων ovK 
ἐστή. 

/ 3 A A 3 / “ 2 # / 
μὴτε ἐν TH κεφαλὴ σου ὁμόσησ OTL ov δύνασαι μίαν 
τρίχα λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν ποιῆσαι. 

Eleventh Century. τῶ καιρῶ εκεινω συμβουλιων 
ἐλαβων παντεσ οἱ αἀρχιερεῖσ καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι του 


A + / ᾽ὔ 
λαοῦ κατα του Ww, ὦστε θανατόσε avTov. 


Twelfth Century. εἰρήνη ἐν χριστῶ τῶ θεῶ πιστὴ 


Λ e / € 7 
βασίλισσα ῥωμαίων ἡ δούκαινα. 


PRONUNCIATION, 


§ 48. 


No light whatever can be thrown on the subject 
of the ancient Greek pronunciation, unless the fol- 
lowing propositions be taken for granted : — 

That the Greeks, during the golden age of their 
language, that is, from Homer to Aristotle, strictly 
speaking, spelled their words as they pronounced 
them. ‘This proposition is based on the fact, that 


the Greek, as such, is essentially an original lan- — 


guage. 

That the pronunciation of the silver age, that is, 
from Aristotle to the commencement of the Chris- 
tian era, was essentially the same as that of the 
golden age. 

That the pronunciation of the brazen age, that 
is, of the first three centuries of our era, was, in 
many important points, different from that of the 
two preceding ages. 

That the sound which the ancient Greeks gave 
to any letter is to be found in one or more of the 
modern languages of Europe. 





PRONUNCIATION, 87 


That the modern Greek sound of a particular let- 
ter, or combination of letters, is to be regarded as 
the original sound, unless the contrary can be 
clearly shown. 


ROMAN MODE OF WRITING GREEK WORDS. 


§ 44, 


A is represented by A; Ἀνακρέων, Anacreon. 





E E short ; ἐπιθήκη, &pitheca. 

H — E long ; Στησίχορος, Stésichorus. 

I — [: Ἴλιον, Ilion. 

O — O short ; “Ounpos, Homerus. 

2 —— O long ; δίωτος, diota. 

Y —— Y; Tirupos, ‘Tityrus, ἀλκυών, halcyon. 


The Latin y is the same as the Greek v, and is 
used only in words taken directly from the Greek. 
The Roman scholars introduced this Greek letter 
into their language because its peculiar sound (that 
of French w) had no representative in the Latin 
alphabet. In words, however, common to both 
these languages, the Greek v usually appears as 
wu in Latin ; as, ὑπέρ, super, ὑπό, sub, σῦς, sus, pos, 
mus, φυγεῖν, fugio, φυγή, fuga. 

Quintil. 12, 10,27. Jucundissimas ex Graecis litteras non 


habemus, vocalem alteram, alteram consonantem, quibus nullae 
apud eos dulcius spirant ; quas mutare solemus quoties illorum 


88 PRONUNCIATION. 


nominibus utimur. Quod cum contigit nescio quomodo hila- 
rior protinus renidet oratio, ut in Ephyris et Zephyris. 


Victorin. Gram. 18, Literae peregrinae sunt Z et Y, quae 
peregrinae a nobis propter Graeca quaedam nomina assumptae 
sunt, ut Hylas, Zephyrus ; quae si non essent, Hoelus et Sdephy- 
rus diceremus. 

Isidor. 1,4, 15. A Graecis autem literas duas mutavit La- 
tinitas, Y et Z, propter nomina scilicet Graeca, et hae apud 
Romanos usque ad Augusti tempus non scribebantur, sed pro 
Z duas S ponebant, ut Ailarissat ; pro Y vero I scribebant. 


AI is represented by AE, rarely by AI; αἰγόκερως, 
aegoceros, Maia, Maia. 

: @; Θρᾷκες, Thraces. 

EI I long, sometimes by E long ; Σειρήν, Si- 
ren, Μηδεία, Medea; the former orthography fol- 
lows the analogy of the Beeotic, the latter of the 
Doric ; compare Φειδίας, Boeotic Φιδίας ; ἐπιτή- 
Sevos, Νεῖλος, Doric ἐπιτάδηος, Ninos. 

HI E long ; Θρηίξ, Threx, Θρηῖσσα, Thressa, 
Opnixn, ‘Threcé. 

ΕΥ̓ EU; εὖγε, euge, Εὔανδρος, Evander. 

OI OE, rarely by OI; οἶστρος, oestrus, Τροία, 
Troia. 

M21 
odé. 

Or 
curus. 





a 

















OE, or O long ; κωμωιδός, comoedus, wid%, 





U long ; Οὐρανία, Urania, Ἐπίκουρος, Epi- 


TI 





YI; "Apruas, Harpyiae. 


B is represented by B; βασιλικός, basilicus. 
uF G; γυμνάσιον, gymnasium. Before I, K, 








Sn a ene ee 





PRONUNCIATION. 89 


X, Ξ, it is represented by NV; συγγραφή, syngra- 
pha, ἔγκαυστος, encaustus, Ayxions, Anchises, 
Σφίγξ, Sphinx. 

A ——D; Δημοσθένης, Demosthenes. 








Ζ Z, used only in Greek words ; Ζήνων, Ze- 
no. 

Θ TH ; Θουκυδίδης, Thucydides. 

K C; Κάστωρ, Castor, κῶνος, conus, Κηφισσός, 





Cephissus, Kipxn, Circé, ἀλκυών, halcyon. 

A L; Δυκοῦργος, Lycurgus. 

M —— M; Μηριόνης, Meriones. 

N — N; Νάξος, Naxos. 

Ξ —— X; Ἐενοφῶν, Xenophon. 

a PP . Πήλιον, Pelion. 

P R ; Πρωτεύς, Proteus: p, by rh; as, ῥήτωρ, 
rhetor, σκέῤῥος, scirrhus, Πύῤῥος, Pyrrhus. 

Σ S; Yoxparys, Socrates. 

T ——T; ; Τρίτων, Triton. 

Φ —— ΓΗ; φιλοσοφία, philosophia. 

Χ — CH; Xios, Chios. 

¥ —— PS, sometimes by BS; ais, apsis or absis. 











GREEK MODE OF WRITING ROMAN WORDS. 


§ 4S. 
A is represented by 4; Agrippa, Aypir7as. 
E short, by E; Decius, Aékus, Sextus, Σέξτος : 
E long by H; Felix, Φηλιξ, Festus, Φδῆστος. 
8 * 


90 PRONUNCIATION. 


I, J —— I; Priscus, Πρίσκος, Julius, Ιούλιος. C. I. 
n. 342. Scipio, Σκιπίων, written also Σκηπίων, 
because σκέπων, with which this word is con- 
nected, is written also σκήπων. Curtius, Anecd. 
Delph. n. 38. Τραγιανοῦ for Τραϊανοῦ, ‘Trajani, 
where ITI represents the sound of the Roman J. 

O short, by O; Commodus, Κόμμοδος : O long, by 


2; Antonius, Avtanos. 

U “(ον or Υ΄; Rufus, Ῥοῦφος, Lucius, Δούκιος, 
Romuhts, Ῥωμύλος, Sulla, Σύλλας. After Q, it is 
represented by OY, O, or Y ; Quirinus, Kovipivos, 
Kupivos; C. 1. n. 1325, 2870. Quinctius, Κούγ- 

_ «twos, Quintus, Koivtos. 


AE is represented by AI, rarely by H; Caesar, 
Καῖσαρ; C. 1. 2930. Maevianus, Μηουβιανός. 





AU AY ; Augustus, Αὔγουστος. 
TOE —— OI; Cloelia, Κλοιλία. 
H ——‘; Honorius, ‘Ovapios. 


B is represented by B; Tiberius, Τιβέριος. 
C K ; Cicero, Κικέρων. 





Priscian. p. 543. ed. Putsch. K enim et Q, quamvis figura 
et nomine videantur aliquam habere differentiam, cum C tamen 
eandem tam in sono vocum, quam in metro continent potesta- 
tem. 

CH —— X; Gracchus, Γράκχος. 

D — 4; Decius, Ζέκιος. 

F &; Festus, Φῆστος. The Roman F' had 
originally the sound of the Greek Digamma, that 
is, of the English W. In process of time, its 








PRONUNCIATION. 91 


sound was transferred to V, and the sound orig- 
inally represented by PH was transferred to F. 
Thus, vis was originally written fis, and fuga, 
phuga. (Priscian, above quoted, § 21.) 

G Γ᾽; Granianus, Tpaviaves. 

L — 4; Lucius, Aovxuios. 

M —— M; Marcus, Μάρκος. 

N — Ν; Nero, Νέρων. 

P —— II; Pompeius, Πομπήϊος. 

Q — kK; Quintus, Kéivros. See, also, C. 

R — P; Roma, Ῥώμη. 

S —— 3; Sergius, Σέργιος. 


T ——T; Titys, Τίτος. 
VY —B, bd ἐπ, mt 191. 1 Ὁ 2055. Ὁ. 


192,.2572; 1. Verus, Βῆρος or Οὐῆρος ; Vale- 
rius, Βαλέριος, or Οὐαλέριος ; Nerva, Νέρβας or 
Nepovas. After A, EH, O, it is represented by 
weer or Ts (3, χει... CO We. 
2457. 1732. 2595. Flavius, Φλάβιος, Hraovios ; 
Flavia, Φλαυΐα ; Severus, Σεβῆρος, Σεουῆρος, Yev- 
npos; Novembris, Νουεμβρίων ; E. E. p. 248. 
Avidius, Afiéws, Avidios; C. 1. n. 1425. 1426. 
ABisios ; Letronne, vol. 1, p. 125. Αουίδιος. 

EB; Sextus, Σ ἐξτος. 





X 





92 PRONUNCIATION. 


ROMAIC OR MODERN GREEK PRONUNCIATION : 


§ 46. 


Tue Romaic pronunciation cannot be much older 
than the Romaic language itself. Now the first 
Romaic author of whom we have any definite ac- 
count is Theodorus Ptochoprodromos, who flourished 
about the middle of the twelfth century. And if 
we admit that this pronunciation existed five hun- 
dred years before his time, which is admitting too 
much, we may safely assume that the Romaic pro- 
nunciation, as a system, cannot go farther back than 
the seventh century of our era. 

The following specimens of the Romaic of Pto- 
choprodromos may interest some of our readers: 
the verse is technically called iambic tetrameter 
catalectic, and its rhythm depends on accent : 


A x / 2 +. e 7, ε ὔ 
πὸ μικρόθεν μ᾽ ἔλεγεν ὁ γέρων ὁ πατήρ μου, 
ἐς Τέκνον μου, μάθε γράμματα ἂν θέληις va φελέσηις" 
/ Ν val / Ἂν 3 F 2 
Βλέπεις τὸν δεῖνα, τέκνον μου ; πεζὸς ἐπεριπάτει * 
Κ \ / / / / 
at τώρα, βλέπεις, γέγονε χρυσοφτερνιστηραάτος, 
/ 
Αλογοτριπλοντέληνος καὶ παχυμουλαράτος.᾽" 


Ἃ > ¥ Ἂς 7 Ν v4 / 
Ap μ᾽ ἔλειπαν τὰ γράμματα καὶ μάθαινα τεχνίτης 
> 5, δ A / Ν Ν Ἂς A 
At αὑτους ὁποῦ κάμνουσι τὰ κλαπωτα καὶ ζοῦσι, 
4.) / x Ν 73 2 ἢ 7 
Na pala τέχνην κλαπωτὴν καὶ va ζουν μετ᾽ ἐκείνην. 
N ͵΄ κ Ν ἈΝ XN 7 
Με ταύτην γὰρ τὴν κλαπωτὴν τὴν περισορεμένην 


\ Ψ Ν > 7 Ν Ὁ. / 
Na avovya τὸ appapw μου va τὸ BpicKa γεμάτον 





PRONUNCIATION. 93 


Poly κρασὶν πληθυντικὸν καὶ θυννομαγερίαν, 
Καὶ παλαμυδοκόμματα καὶ τσίρους καὶ σκουμπρία. 
The Romaic has but five vowel-sounds, namely, 
A, E, I, O, OY, pronounced as follows : 


A, like a in father, far. After the sound J, like a 
in peculiarity, nearly ; or like a in fat, pat, but 
not so sharp. 

E, like the first e in veneration, but a little longer. 

I, like 2 in machine, or ee in feel. 

O, like o in confuse, but a little longer. 


OF, like u in rule, or 00 in moon. 


As to the vowels H, Y, and , the first two have 


each the sound of J, and is sounded like O; as, 


"τιμή, Repos, σῶμα, σωτήρ, pronounced τιμί, κίριος, 


copa, σοτίρ. 





The Romaic has no diphthongal sounds, properly 
so called ; as to the combinations AI, a, AY, EI, EY, 
HI, HY, OI, OI, NY, YI, technically called diph- 


thongs, they are sounded as follows : 


AI, like E; as, γυναίκα, “Ἥφαιστος, pronounced 


γινέκα, ΠἊφεστος. 


a, like A; ἄδω, κυρίᾳ, pronounced ἄδω, κιρία. 
_ EI, HI, OI, YI, each like I; ἐκεῖνος, τιμῇ, οἴκημα, 


υἱός, pronounced EKLVOS; τιμί, ίκιμα, ιός. 


(AT, EY, HY, OF, before a vowel, or before B, T, 4, 


A, M, N, P, are pronounced like AB, EB, IB, OB; 
in all other cases, like A$, ES, If, OF ; that is, 
Y in these diphthongs is equivalent to B or Φ ; as, 


94 PRONUNCIATION, 


αὖος, aBos; evot, εβί; εὔβουλος, ἔβ-βουλος ; εὖγε, ᾿ 
ἔβγε ; εὐδαίμων, .εβδέμον ; εὐλαβής, εβχλαβίς ; εὐμε- 
/ / Μ / Ce: " 3 > 
νής, εβμενίς ; εὔνοια, ἔβνια ; εὑρίσκω, εβρίσκο : αὖθις, 
άφθις ; ταῦ, Tad ; βασιλεῦ, βασιλέφ ; αὔξησις, ἀφξι- — 
“ 7 a 

σις ; evdopos, εφ-φορος. 


The Romaic has twenty-one consonant sounds, — 
represented by B, I, 4, Z, ©, K, A, M, N, Hi, P, 3,@ 
PPX. 7 


B is weaker than v, but stronger than w; it is best — 
represented by v; as, Bios, vee’-oss, συλλαβή, See- — 
lah-vee’. ‘The Spanish 6 between two vowels 
expresses it exactly. 4 

I’, before the sounds E and I, is sounded like y in — 
yes, year, but stronger ; as, γέρων, yyéh-ron, ἔγινα, 
éh-yyee-nah: in all other cases, it is guttural, — 
and has no representative in English: these two — 
sounds, however, are essentially the same. q 

Before Τὶ K, X, or Βα (that is, ΚΣ), it is@ 
sounded like ng in hang, in which case K and © 
the second I have each the sound of g hard, as — 
In give, £0; as, ἄγγελος, dng-geh-loss, ἀνάγκη, 
ah-nang-gee, σύγχυσις, sing-chee-seess, σάλπιγξ 
(that is, σάλπιγκς), sdl-ping-gs. 

4, like ΤῊ in this, that, rather; or like Spanish α΄ 
between two vowels; as, δοῦλος, THOO'-loss, wn- 
δῶ, pee-THON, ‘ 

Z, like z; as, ζωή, zoh-ee', φράζω, frdh-zoh. 3 

@, like th in thin, theme, mouth; as, θεός, theh-dss, — 
ἔθος, éh-thoss. ὴ 





PRONUNCIATION, 95 


_K, like k; as, κακός, kah-késs, κύριος, kee'-ree-oss. 

After T, it has the sound of g hard, as συγ- 
Kpove, sing-grov'-oh, ἀγκάς, ang-gass. 

A, like 1; as, λόγος, loh-ghoss. Before the sound 1, 
like WZ or {{ in William ; or like Spanish JJ, Ital- 
ian gl, but not so strong ; as, καλή, kah-llee’. 

M, like m; as, μήτηρ, mee’-teer, ἐμός, eh-méss. 

N, like ἢ; as, νόμος, ndh-moss, μένω, méh-noh. Be- 
fore the sound 1, like n or nt in opinion; or like 
Spanish 7, Italian gn, but not so strong; as, 
νίπτω, jiee’-ptoh. 

The final N of the proclitics av, δέν, ἐν, σύν, τόν, 
τήν, before K, or & (that is, ΚΣ), is pronounced 
like I under the same circumstances, that is, like 
ng in hang ; before II, or ¥ (that is, ΠΣ), like 
M ; as, ἂν κόπτω, ang-goptoh, ἐν ξύλῳ, eng-gsee'- 
loh ; σὺν πόνῳ, seem-boh-noh, τὴν ψυχήν, teem- 
bsee-chee'n. 

B, like ΚΣ, or x in ave ; as, ἄξιος, Gxioss. After TI, 
or after one of the above-mentioned proclitics, it 
is sounded like gs; as, σάλπιγξ, sdl-peeng-gs, 
τὸν ξηρόν, tong-gseeron. 

IT, like p; as, πίνω, pee’-noh. After Μ, like ὃ ; as, 
ἐμπρός, em-bréss, συμπίνω, seem-pee'noh. So when 
it is preceded by one of the above-mentioned pro- 
clitics ; as, ἐν πόλει, em-bdh-lee. 

P, like r; as, ῥάβδος, rah-vTHOss. 

>, like s in soft, sing; as, σῶμα, sdh-mah, ἔσω, 


éh-soh. 


96 PRONUNCIATION. 


Before B, I, 4, M, N, or P, it is sounded like 
Ζ; as, Σμύρνη, Zmeer’-nee, Icpanr, ee-zrah-eell ; 
also, in the proclitics TOUS, Tas; as, τοὺς γέροντας, 
tooz-yy¢h-ron-dass, τὰς βασιλείας, taz-vah-see-lee'- 
ass. 

T, like ¢ in tell, tap, tin; as, τόπος, toh-poss, αἰτία, 
eh-tee’-ah. 

After N, it is generally sounded like d; as, 
ἔντιμος, €n-dee-moss, ἐνταῦθα, en-daf-thah ; so also 
after the proclitics av, δέν, ἐν, σύν, Tov, τήν ; AS, ἂν 
τρέχω, an-dréh-kho, τὸν τίμιον, ton-dee’'mion. Beda 
(A. D. 673-735) writes enneneconda for ἐννενή- 
κοντα. See above, ὃ 20. 

ΤΣ, like ts, used only in foreign and barbarous 
words; as, τσελάτης, τσακίζω, ἔκατσα. ‘The By- 
zantine Greeks represented this sound by TZ; 
as, Terns, Tzetzes. 

d, like f, or ph; as, φέρω, feh-roh, σοφός, soh- 
Joss. 

X, like German ch, or Spanish x (7); as, χαρά, 
khah-rah. 

Ψ like ΠΣ, or ps in perhaps; as, ἕψω, éh-psoh. 
After M, or after one of the above-mentioned pro- 
clitics, like bs; as, ἔμψυχος, ém-bsee-choss, τὴν 
ψυχήν, teem-bsee-chee'n. 


When a consonant is doubled in the same word, 
only the first one is pronounced; as, σφάλλω, γράμ- 
μα, pronounced σφώλο, γράμα. But when 33 come 
together, the first of which belongs to the preceding 





PRONUNCIATION. 97 


word, accurate readers pronounce both; as, πατρός 
σου, peo ᾽ς τὸ δάσος, ὡς ς τὸν πάτον. 

The breathings, in Romaic, have no power what- 
ever ; that is, they are mere orthographical marks; 
as, ἔχω, ἕπομαι, pronounced exo, ἔπομε. 


' 
oun ὁ 47. 

In colloquial style and in poetry, synizesis is very 
common. It takes place chiefly when the sound I 
is followed by a vowel, in which case, if the I is 
accented, the accent, after the synizesis, is put on 
the vowel following the I; as, ἄξιος, ὀξύα, xpaciov, 
trisyllabic ; ἄ-ξιος, ὀ-ξυά, κρα-σιοῦ, dissyllabic. 

After the consonants B, 4, P, also after a vowel, 
or at the beginning of a word, the J, in this case, 
is sounded like I before I, that is, like y in yes, 
year ; as, Bia, καρδία, θηρία, ἔνα, ἰατρός, pronounced 
by synizesis, Bya, Kapoya, θηργά, ἔγα, YaTpos. After 
0, II, T, $, the I is sounded like X before 1, or like 
h before ee; as, θειάφι, ὅποιος, φωτία, ἀφιόνι, pro- 
nounced by synizesis, @hadu, ὅπ]ος, φωτῆώ, αφ]ιόνι. 
After M, the I has the sound of N before I; as, 
pia, Ῥωμιός, by synizesis, pia, Papiios. 

When the Greeks wish to write a word as it is 
pronounced in synizesis, they write ΓῚ for I, when 
the I, in synizesis, has the sound of y hard ; thus, 
Bia, ἰατρός, if written as they are pronounced by 
synizesis, become βγιώ, γιατρός : when the I has the 

9 


98 PRONUNCIATION. 


sound of X before I, or of h before ee, they write 
XI; thus, θειάφι, ὅποιος, if written as they are pro- 
nounced by synizesis, become θχιάφι, ὄπχιος : for 
MI, in synizesis, they write MNI; thus, μία, if 
written as it is pronounced by synizesis, becomes 
μνιά. Before the sounds E and 1, however, they 
represent the sound of I by I, X; thus, ἱεράκι, πιί, 
if written as they are pronounced by synizesis, be- 
come γεράκι, πχί, not γιεράκι, TX Ub 
\ 
. § 48. 


The Romaic acute accent does not differ from 
the English accent; thus, the accent of χαίρετε, 
Niece, ἄνθρωπος, is the same as that of library, 
liberty, shoemaker. 

The grave, that is, the acute at the end of a 
word before another word, is the same in kind as 
the acute, except that it is not so strong. 

As to the corcumflex, the modern Greeks having 
no long syllables, it is not distinguished from the 
acute under similar circumstances. 

A prociitic is, in respect to accent, pronounced 
as if it were a part of the next word. In Romaic, 
the principal proclitics are the article, the prepo- 
sitions, the monosyllabic personal pronouns (except 
tov), the auxiliary θά, and the conjunctions καί, ἄν, 
va; aS, ὁ ἄνθρωπος, εἰς THY πόλιν, pronounced οάνθρω- 
πος, ἐἰστιμπόλιν. 


An enclitic is pronounced as if it were a part of 








PRONUNCIATION. 99 


the preceding word ; as, ἄνθρωπός τις, ἄνθρωποί τινες, 
pronounced ἀνθροπόστις, ἀνθροπίτινες, With a weak 
accent on the last syllable: λόγος τις, δεῖξόν μοι, pro- 
nounced λόγοστις, δίξονμι Ἢ πατρός σου, γυναικῶν τίνων, 
pronounced πατρόσσου, γινεκόντινον. 

As quantity is not predicated of the Romaic 
vowel-sounds, the rhythm of Romaic verse entirely 
depends on accent ; as, 


ΣῈ γνωρίζω ἀπὸ τὴν κόψη Trochaic dimeter. 
Τοῦ σπαθιοῦ τὴν τρομερή, Do. catalectic. 

Σὲ γνωρίζω ἀπὸ τὴν ὄψη 

- ᾽Ποῦ μὲ βία μετράει τὴν γῆ. 

Πλανήτρα Φήμη φθονερή lambic dimeter. 

Φιδογχλωσσοῦ φαρμακερή 
Mnvitpa τέτοιων τρόμων, Do. catalectic. 
Aev ἔσκανες ᾽ς τὸν δρόμον ; 

Θάνατε Θάνατε, πῶς δὲν πεθαίνεις ; Dactylic. 


/ > 7 / / 
Movos ἀθάνατος πάντοτε μένεις. 


§ 49. 
With regard to dividing words into syllables, the 


modern Greeks observe the following rules : — 

1, A single consonant standing between two 
vowels is placed at the beginning of the syllable ; 
as, λε-γό-με-νος, κα-κί-α. 

2. Combinations of consonants capable of com- 
mencing a Greek word are placed at the beginning 
of the syllable. Consequently, the followimg com- 
binations can commence a syllable: 


100 PRONUNCIATION. 


+ / / 
Bo, BX, Bp 3 ε-βδε-ον, στρε-βλὸς, a-Bpos. 

ὃ 3 ὮΝ 7 + ς / ¢ Υ 
yO, Ys YY Ves ἐ-γὸόου-πη-σα, αὐ-γλη, ἄτγνος, υτγρος. 
du, ὃν, Sp ; κε-κα-δμέ-νος, ὕτδνον, ὕτ-δρα. 

Or, Ov, Op ; ὑ-θλεῖν, τέ-θνη-κα, ἄ-θρους. 
KN, KM, KV, Κρ, KT; KU-KNOS, ἄ-κμων, τέ-κνον, πι-κρός, 
τα-κτι-κός. 
BV; σε-μνός. 
ς A 3 / TA 
TN, TV, WT; GA-WHOVS, ὑ-πνος, TU-TTO. 
oB, o0, ox, TKN, OKY, OM, OT, TT, OTA, OTP, oh, αὐ 
- y+ Μ 3 / 3 / Μ 
ox; ἐ-σβην, €-cOos, ἀ-σκος, ἐ-σκλήτρητνα, ἄτσμε-νος, 
> / ε / y+ > / > / 
ὥτσπίις, ὑπστος, A-TTPOP, ἀτ-σφό-δε-λος, 0-o ppal-vo-mat, 
ἰσσχύς. 
yf 5 / 5 7] 
TA, TH, TP; (ΑἈ4-τλας, ἀ-τμος, ἱταττρος. 
Μ 3 / yf 5 / 
HO, dr, hy, dp; ε-φθην, ἐ-φλί-βην, αἰ-φνης, ἀ-φρος. 
A 3 θ Ἢ / VA 3 / 
x9, XN, KY, XP 3 ἐ-χθες, Kt-XNA, συτχνος, A-Kpas. 


The following combinations, also, may commence 


a syllable : 


YH, Ou, oy; TV, after the analogy Of Ku, TH, OK; AS, 
πρᾶ-γμα, ἴ-θμα, ὑ-σγι-νο-βα-φής, ἔ-τνος. 

KTp, πτρ, σθμ, σκρ, σπρ, σχν, σχρ, χθρ; AS, οἰἱ-κτρός, 
ρό-πτρον, ἄ-σθμα, "A-oxpa, ἄτ-σπρος (Romaic, signi- 
fying white), i-cxvos, αἰ-σχρός, ἐ-χθρός. 


3. When the combination cannot commence a 
Greek word or syllable, its first consonant belongs 
to the preceding syllable ; as, ἵπτ-πος, dy-yo, ψάλ- 
hw, τύρ-σις, ἀρ-γός, Δαμ-πτρεύς. 

4. A compound word is resolved into its compo- 
nent parts, if the first part ends with a consonant . 





PRONUNCIATION. >>) >? | > 101 


as, προσ-έρχομαι, ἐξ-άγω, ἐκ-φορά, δυσ-πραξία, av- 
ἄξιος. But if the first part ends in a vowel, the 
compound is divided like a simple word, even when 
that vowel has been cut off; as, κα-τά-γω, a-va-yo, 
πά-ρει-μι, ἀν-θί-στημι. 

5. When elision takes place, the preceding word 
is, in pronunciation, regarded as a part of the fol- 
lowing ; as, ἀλ-λ᾿ ἐ-γώ, ma-p ἐ-μοῦ, pe-O ἡ-μῶν, 
é-f wi, σέ-μν᾽᾿ ἔ-πη, ὥσ-τ᾽ ov-de. So, also, in the 
case of οὐκ or οὐχ ; ov-K ὠ-φελοῦσιν, οὐ-χ ἅ-πασιν. 


PROBABLE ANCIENT PRONUNCIATION. 


VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, 
§ 50. 


Tue Greek has five vowel-sounds, represented 
as follows: long A, H, I, 2, Y ; corresponding short 
A, E,I, 0,7. ‘The long vowels differ from the 
short ones in length, but not in power. 

Aristotel. Poet. 20. Ἔστι δὲ φωνῆεν μὲν ἄνευ προσβολῆς ἔχον 
φωνὴν ἀκουστὴν, οἷον τὸ A καὶ τὸ Q, 

Dionys. Thrax, 7, in Bekker’s Anecd. Φωνήεντα μέν εἶσιν 
ἑπτὰ, A, E, H, I, 0, Y, καὶ Q. Φωνήεντα δὲ λέγεται διότι φωνὴν ἀφ᾽ 
ἑαυτῶν ἀποτελεῖ, οἷον ἃ, 7. 

Dionys. Halicarn. de Compos. 14. Κράτιστα μέν ἐστι καὶ 
φωνὴν ἡδίστην ἀποτελεῖ τά τε μακρὰ, καὶ τῶν διχρόνων ὅσα μηκύνεται 
κατὰ τὴν ἐκφοράν..... χείρω δὲ τὰ βραχέα, ἢ τὰ βραχέως λεγόμενα. 

Sext. adv. Gram. 1,5. Καὶ φωνάεντα μὲν ἑπτὰ, A, E, H, I, O, 
στρ Τῶν δὲ φωναέντων τρεῖς ἄγουσι διαφορὰς " δύο μὲν γὰρ 


9 * 


102. ne. See)! PRAMUNCIATION. 


αὐτῶν φύσει μακρὰ λέγουσι τυγχάνειν, τὸ Ἡ καὶ τὸ Ὡ : ἰσάριθμα δὲ 
βραχέα, τὸ E καὶ τὸ Ο τρία δὲ κοινὰ μήκους τε καὶ βραχύτητος, 
A, I, Y, ἅπερ δίχρονα καὶ ὑγρὰ καὶ ἀμφίβολα καὶ μεταβολικὰ καλοῦσιν " 
ἕκαστον γὰρ αὐτῶν πέφυκεν ὁτὲ μὲν ἐκτείνεσθαι ὁτὲ δὲ συστέλλεσθαι. 
Id. ibid. 1. Ὁ. Δισσοῦ οὖν ὄντος τοῦ A καὶ I καὶ Y, οὐκ ἔτι ἑπτὰ 
γενήσεται μόνον στοιχεῖα povdevta,..... ἀλλὰ τὰ σύμπαντα δέκα, καὶ 
τούτων τὰ πέντε μὲν μακρὰ, τό τε H καὶ τὸ Q, καὶ τὸ μακρὸν καὶ I 
καὶ Υ" ἰσάριθμα δὲ τὰ βραχέα, τὸ Ο καὶ τὸ E καὶ τὸ βραχὺ A καὶ I 


καὶ Y. 


A. 


A long was sounded like a in father; A short, 
like ὦ in past, nearly. 


Dionys. Hal. de Comp. 14. Αὐτῶν δὲ τῶν μακρῶν εὐφωνότατον 
\ ef > , , \ > ΄ a , + is" - 
τὸ A, ὅταν ἐκτείνηται - λέγεται yap ἀνοιγομένου τοῦ στόματος ἐπὶ πλεῖ- 


στον, καὶ τοῦ πνεύματος ἄνω φερομένου πρὸς τὸν οὐρανόν. 
E, Η. 


E like the first 6 in veneration; H like eh, or 
rather like French ὁ as in féte. 


Plat. Cratyl. p. 418 C. οἱ παλαιοὶ of ἡμέτεροι τωῖ lata καὶ τωῖ 
Δέλτα εὖ pada ἐχρῶντο, καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα ai γυναῖκες αἵπερ μάλιστα τὴν 
- a a ὌΝ 
ἀρχαίαν φωνὴν σώζουσι. Νῦν δὲ ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ Τῶτα ἢ E ἢ Hra μετα- 
στρέφουσιν, ἀντὶ δὲ τοῦ Δέλτα Ζῆτα, ὡς δὴ μεγαλοπρεπέστερα ὄντα. 
....Oltov, οἱ μὲν ἀρχαιότατοι ἱμέραν τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκάλουν, οἱ δὲ 
¢ 7 c A ς i 
ἑμέραν, οἱ δὲ ἡμέραν. 

Dionys. Hal. 14. Δεύτερον δὲ τὸ H, ὅτι κάτω περὶ τὴν βάσιν 
τῆς γλώσσης ἐρείδει τὸν ἦχον ἀκόλουθον, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἄνω, καὶ μετρίως 
ἀνοιγομένου τοῦ στόματος. 

Sext. adv. Gram. 1,5. Ei γὰρ τὸ A κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐκτεινόμενον 

‘ , > a / > “ > 5 ἁ A ¢ ’ 
καὶ συστελλόμενον οὐχ ἕτερόν ἐστι στοιχεῖον, ἀλλ᾽ ἕν κοινὸν, ὡσαύτως 
δὲ καὶ τὸ I καὶ τὸ Υ, ἀκολουθήσει καὶ τὸ E καὶ τὸ Η ἕν εἶναι στοιχεῖον 

A 4 > \ / \ ς A 3 \ / =) > , 
κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν δύναμιν κοινὸν " ἡ γὰρ αὐτὴ δύναμις ἐπ᾿ ἀμφοτέρων 


\ 
ἐστί. Καὶ συσταλὲν μὲν τὸ Η γίνεται E, ἐκταθὲν δὲ τὸ E γίνεται H. 








PRONUNCIATION. 103 


H had the sound of long E as late as the time of 
Sextus (4.7). 190). After that period it was pro- 
nounced like E or I, and finally the sound I prevailed. 
Thus, in the Codex Alexandrinus, one of the oldest 
manuscripts extant, perhaps as old as the commence- 
ment of the sixth century, E or I is often used for 
H, and H for E or I, because the copier spelled as 
he pronounced ; as (vol. 1, p. 1X.), ἀναστεμα, ἕετειτε; 
Lovov, evOns, πίητε; nv, διαχωρησαῖι, χρήσεις; for avactn- 


al f 2 7 3 
μα, ζητεῖτε, ἥδιον, εὐθές, πίετε, ἐν, διαχωρίσαι, χρίσεις. 


‘a 

I long, like ὁ in marine, or ee in feel; I short, 
like ὁ in terminal. 

Dionys. Hal. 14. Ἔστι δὲ πάντων ἔσχατον τὸ I+ περὶ τοὺς 
ὀδόντας τε γὰρ ἡ κρότησις τοῦ πνεύματος γίνεται, μικρὸν ἀνοιγομένου 
τοῦ στόματος καὶ οὐκ ἐπιλαμπρυνόντων τῶν χειλέων τὸν ἦχον. 

Ο, Ω. 

O, like o in confuse ; 2, like o in Oh, or rather 
like French eaw in beau. 

Dionys. 14. Τρίτον δὲ τὸ Ὡ - στρογγύλλεταί te yap ἐν αὐτωῖ τὸ 
στόμα, καὶ περιστέλλει τὰ χείλη, τήν τε πληγὴν τὸ πνεῦμα περὶ τὸ 
ἀκροστόμιον ποιεῖται. 

Τῶν δὲ βραχέων οὐδέτερον μὲν εὔηχον, ἧττον δὲ δυσηχὲς τὸ O. 

In the earlier manuscripts, O and are often 
interchanged, which shows that 2 began to be 
pronounced like O as early as the sixth century; as 
(Codex Alexandrinus, 1, p. 1X.), αθοωθησεται, ἀρχίιε- 
ροσυνης, ὠλοθρευων, for ἀθωωθήσεται, ἀρχιερωσύνης, 


ὀλοθρεύων. 


104 PRONUNCIATION. 


i. 


Y long, like French w in une. This is infer- 
red from the description of Dionysius, and from 
the fact, that v, at the beginning of a word, takes 
the rough breathing, in the Attic dialect at least. 
(Compare English uw in such words as union.) 
Originally, it had the sound of 00 in moon, book, or 
of the Italian w, French ow. The A®olians of Boeo- 
tia, in order to preserve its original sound, prefixed 
an o to it; as, θουγάτηρ for θυγάτηρ. (See OY, below.) 
About the commencement of the Christian era, it 
began to be pronounced like I; thus, in an inscription 
we find (C. 1. n. 1168) Τυβέριος, for Τιβέριος, mere- 
ly because the stone-cutter did not distinguish be- 
tween TandI. ‘The same change happened to the 
Latin y, the antitype of the Greek v. 

Dionys. 14. Ἔστι δὲ ἧττον τούτου [τοῦ Ω] τὸ Υ περὶ yap αὐτὰ 
τὰ χείλη συστολῆς γενομένης ἀξιολόγου πνίγεται καὶ στενὸς ἐκπίπτει 
ὁ ἦχος. 

When a syllable was long by position, its vowel 
retained its short sound ; for instance, the penult of 
τάγμα, ἐστίν, ἴσμεν, ὅρκος, ὕδνον, is long, not because 
the vowels were prolonged in pronunciation, but 
because of the obstruction occasioned by yp, στ; cp, 
ox, ov. Had the vowel, in this case, been prolonged 
in pronunciation, the Greeks would have written 
» for e, and ὦ for o, and such words as τάγμα, ἴσμεν, 
vévov would have been accented raypa, ἴσμεν, vdvor ; 





ae ee a ey 





PRONUNCIATION. 105 


the Ionians, moreover, would have used ἡ for a. 
The same remark applies to Latin syllables long by 
position merely ; as, Marcus, Μάρκος, Flaccus, Φλάκ- 
kos, Sextus, Σέξτος, centurio, κεντυρίων, Tertius, Τέρ- 
TLOS. 

Quintil. 1,5. Evenit ut metri quoque conditio mutet ac- 
centum ; ut, ““ Pecudes pictaeque volucres.” Nam volucres 


media acuta legam, quia, etsi natura brevis, tamen positione 
longa est, ne faciat iambum, quem non recipit versus heroicus. 


§ 51. 


Seven diphthongs, AI, AY, EI, EY, OI, OY, YI, | 
begin with a short vowel, and six, AI, AY, HI, HY, 
NI, NY, with a long one. ‘The latter differ from 
the former only in the prolongation of the first 
vowel. 

It is natural to suppose, that, during the most 
flourishing period of the language, both the vowels 
of a diphthong were distinctly heard. As early, 
however, as the time of Sextus (A. D. 190), most 
of the diphthongs had the power of single vowels; 
that is, they were not diphthongs in pronunciation. 


Dionys. Thrax, in Bekker’s Anecdota. Δίφθογγοι δέ εἰσιν ἕξ, 
AI, AY, EI, EY, OI, OY. 

Sert. adv. Gram. 1,5. Καὶ ἀναστρόφως ἔσεσθαί twa φασὶν 
ἔνιοι τῶν φιλοσόφων πλείονα στοιχεῖα διάφορον ἔχοντα δύναμιν τῶν 
συνήθως παραδιδομένων, οἷον τὸ EI καὶ τὸ ΑΙ καὶ τὸ OY καὶ πᾶν ὃ τῆς 
ὁμοίας ἐστὶ φύσεως. Τὸ γὰρ στοιχεῖον κριτέον μάλιστα ὅτι στοιχεῖόν 


3 3 a > , A \ + , er > ε ~ 
ἐστιν ἐκ TOU ἀσύνθετον Kal μονοποιὸν ἔχειν φθόγγον, olds ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ 


106 PRONUNCIATION. 


A καὶ E καὶ O καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν. Ἐπεὶ οὖν ὁ τοῦ AI καὶ EI φθόγγος 
ἁπλοῦς ἐστι καὶ μονοειδὴς, ἔσται καὶ ταῦτα στοιχεῖα. 

Bekker’s Anecd. p. 808, Δίφθογγοι δὲ λέγονται ἐπειδὴ ἐκ δύο 
φθόγγων συνίστανται " φθόγγοι δὲ καλοῦνται κατὰ μουσικὸν λόγον τὰ 
γράμματα. Καὶ οὐ μόνον εἰσὶν ἕξ δίφθογγοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἕνδεκα, ὧν αἱ μὲν 
ἕξ εἰσιν εὔφωνοι, ὡς καὶ αὐτός [ὁ Διονύσιος) φησιν, αἱ δὲ τρεῖς κακό- 
ΟΡ ἢ fil. sf - ς ἡ QY,.....9 ὙΠ’ αἱ δὲ τρεῖς ἄφωνοι, τὸ Q καὶ 
ἘΠ ΉΣ . 2. TO Ἡ kat-ro 1). ΠΑ μακρὸν Mat. 

Ibid. p. 804. τῶν διφθόγγων ai μέν εἰσι κατ᾽ ἐπικράτειαν, ὡς ἐπὶ 
τῆς El διφθόγγου καὶ τῆς HI καὶ τῆς QI καὶ τῆς ΑΙ τῆς ἐχούσης τὸ 1 
ἀνεκφώνητον. Ἐπὶ τούτων ὁ φθόγγος τοῦ ἑνὸς φωνήεντος ἐπικρατεῖ 
καὶ αὖτος ἐξακούεται, οἷον Νεῖλος, THt Ἑλένηι, T@t καλωῖ, τηῖ 


Μηδείαι, καὶ τὸ Θραίξ. 


AT. 


AI was sounded like az in aisle, nearly. ‘The 
Beeotians began very early to pronounce this diph- 
thong like 7; thus, they wrote and pronounced 
Hondevs, κή, εὐεργέτης, KEKOMLOTN, ὀφείλετη, for Aionrevs, 
καί, εὐεργέταις, κεκόμισται, ὀφείλεται. In process of 
time, the other Greeks also adopted this pronun- 
ciation, but retained the original orthography. So 
that, when Sextus says that AI was a simple sound, 
he merely states, that, in his time, it was pronounced 
like H, which sound finally degenerated into E ; as, 
δόξες, pupies, κέκρυπτε, “Hdeoros, found in inscriptions 
belonging to the first three centuries of our era. 


AY, EY. 


AY, like ou in house ; EY, like éh-oo rapidly ut- 
tered. In later times, they were probably sounded 





PRONUNCIATION. 107 


like the Romaic av, ev ; thus, in the Septuagint we 
find Δαυίδ or Δαβίδ, Λευί, Νινευή, where v represents 
the Hebrew Vav ; in later Greek inscriptions, Avi- 
810s, Avidius, Σευῆρος, Severus. Further, in a later 
inscription (C. 1. n. 270), ΕΥ̓ΦΉΒΟΙΣ is put for 
Ἐφήβοις, because EY was pronounced like E%, and 
the stone-cutter spelled the word as he pronounced 
it. Compare Iwvay, in the Septuagint, for Javan. 


EI. 


EI, like δὲ in freight, nearly. The Beeotians 
_ began very early to pronounce it like I; thus, they 
wrote and pronounced ipava, κιμένας, ἀπέχι, for εἰρή- 
VN, κειμένας, ἀπέχει. In process of time, the other 
Greeks also adopted this pronunciation, but re- 
tained the original orthography ; and in inscriptions 
belonging to the first three.centuries of the Chris- 
tian era, I is often written for EI; as, ey, λιτα- 
veviv, ts. 

Callim. Epigr. 29. Avoavia, σύγε ναίχι καλὸς καλὸς " ἀλλὰ 
"ΘΙ 
vaixt, καλός rhyme with ἔχει, ἄλλος, which, however, proves 
similarity, but not identity, of sound. 

Bekker’s Anecd. p. 798. [Τὸ 1] συγγένειάν twa πρὸς τὸ E+ καὶ 


~ ~ ~ 3 
πρὶν εἰπεῖν Τοῦτο σαφῶς, Ἡχὼ φησί τις, ““ἴΑλλος ἔχει. 


δείκνυσιν ἐκ τοῦ τὴν ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ I εἶναι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ E γράμματος, 
says Herodian, the son of Apollonius. That is, the name Εἶ 
of the letter E was pronounced °I, like the English δ. 


Ol, 
OI, like οἱ in spoil, nearly. The Boeotians of the 


108 PRONUNCIATION. 


classical period pronounced this diphthong like Tf ; 
thus, they wrote Tvs, ἄλλυς, προβάτυς, Ovvapyos, for 
τοῖς, ἄλλοις, προβάτοις, Qoivapyos. In process of time, 
this pronunciation became universal; thus, in in- 
scriptions belonging to the first three centuries, we 
sometimes find Y for OI, merely because the stone- 
cutter spelled as he pronounced; as, C. Ln. 1933. 
ἀνῦξαι, ἀνύξι, for ἀνοῖξαι, ἀνοίξε.. After that period, 
this sound passed into I; thus, in the Codex Alex- 
andrinus (vol. 1, p.1x.) I and OI are sometimes 
interchanged, which shows, that, when that copy 
Was written, OI was pronounced like I; as, φινικες, 
for φοίνικες. We see now what Victorinus means 
when he says, that, if the Romans had not adopted 
the Greek TY, they would have used OE in its place. 


Thuc. ὦ. Ev δὲ tot xakwi οἷα εἰκὸς ἀνεμνήσθησαν καὶ τοῦδε τοῦ 
ἔπους φάσκοντες οἱ πρεσβύτεροι πάλαι αἴδοντες, ““ Ἥξει δωριακὸς 
, \ \ q 8 > a 39 ΄ s ay, ee , 
πόλεμος καὶ λοιμὸς ἅμ᾽ αὐτωῖ. Ἐγένετο μὲν οὖν ἔρις τοῖς ἀνθρώ- 

A \ 5 / > ~ WS ς \ ~ a > b) 
ποις μὴ λοιμὸν ὠνομάσθαι ἐν Tat ἔπει ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν, ἀλλὰ 
λιμόν. ‘This merely shows that some were in favor οἵ pro- 
nouncing the disputed word limos, with an 1, and some, loimos, 
with the diphthong a, not that o. was sounded like «. 


OT: 


OY, like 6h-oo rapidly uttered. In later times it 
was sounded like the Romaic ov, that is, like 00 in 
moon. ‘The Romans represented it by wu, and the 
Greeks represented the Roman wu by ov. Further, 
Dionysius says that it could represent the Digam- 
ma, or the Roman v. Add to this the fact, that, 











PRONUNCIATION, 109 


during the second century of the Christian era, the 
abbreviation 8 began to be used for ov; as, C. I. n. 
1320. 1353, 1375, 2154. Apiotorénss, Μεμμίβ, Αὐρη- 
Nis, Καλλικράτβ, Bern. 

When the Boeotians wrote OY for Y, the O mere- 
ly indicated that the Y retained its original sound : 
thus, when OY stood for Y short, as in ὕδωρ, they 
pronounced it like oo in book ; when it stood for 
T long, they gave it the sound of 00 in moon. But 
when OY arose out of OF, it is more than probable 
that its Boeotic pronunciation was the same as that 
of the other Greeks ; thus, βουνῶν, βούεσσι were pro- 
nounced boh-oo-6n, bo'h-oo-essih, because their ori- 
ginal forms were βοξῶν, βόξεσσι. (C. 1. n. 1569.) 


ΤΙ, 
YI, like wa in swing, nearly. 


BREATHINGS. 


§ 52. 


The rough breathing corresponds to the Latin or 
English ἡ, as in humanus, humane. 

As to the smooth breathing, it was employed by 
the ancient grammarians to denote the effort with 
which a vowel not preceded by another letter is 
pronounced. As, however, no vowel at the begin- 
ning of a word can be uttered without a slight 
effort or breathing, the character denoting this 


breathing is entirely unnecessary. 
10 


110 PRONUNCIATION. 


Bekker’s Anecd. pp. 692-694. Ἔστι yap ἡ μὲν Ψιλὴ ποιότης 
συλλαβῆς καθ᾽ ἣν ἄκροις τοῖς χείλεσι TO πνεῦμα προφέρεται, οἷον 
Αἴας ἡ δὲ δασεῖα ποιότης συλλαβῆς, καθ᾽ ἣν ἀθρόον ἐκ βάθους 
χειλέων τὸ πνεῦμα ἐκφέρεται, οἷον FALOS.....- ‘H μὲν δασεῖα ἐκ τοῦ 
θώρακος ἐκπέμπεται, ἡ δὲ Ψιλὴ ἐξ ἄκρων τῶν χειλέων. 

Isidor. Orig. 18, 10. Ψιλή, quod interpretatur siccitas, 
sive purum, id est, ubi H litera esse non debet. 

The Asiatic Aolians made very little use of the 
rough breathing. The Beeotians, a branch of the 
FEolic race, used it oftener; as, C. 1. ἢ. 1637, 
1642. “Αγήσανδρος, Ἱππαρχία. 

Bekker’s Anecd. p. 693. ‘H Αἰολὶς γλῶττα τὸ ψιλοῦν τὰ στοι- 
χεῖα φιλεῖ, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ Υ πάσης λέξεως ἄρχον πάντες μὲν δασύνου- 
σιν, οἱ δὲ Αἰολεῖς ψιλοῦσιν. 

The Asiatic Ionians began very early to disre- 
gard the rough breathing ; hence, in the Ionic of 
Herodotus, a smooth mute before the rough breath- 
ing is not changed into its corresponding rough ; 
aS, ἀπ-ικνέομαι, KAT ἦν, οὐκ ὅσιον. ‘The fact, also, 
that the Asiatic Jonians were the first to convert 
the breathing H into a vowel, shows that with 
them it was essentially a silent letter. In our 
editions of the Ionic authors, this breathing is suf- 
fered to retain its place merely for the sake of uni- 
formity. 

Tzetzes, p. 62. Oi Αἰολεῖς re kal Ἴωνες πάντα τὰ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν δα- 
συνόμενα Ψψιλού[ μενα] καὶ διὰ ψιλοῦ συμφώνου ἐκφωνοῦσιν. 

Cramer’s Anecd. vol. 4, p. 198. Λξιον δὲ ζητῆσαι διατὶ οἱ 
Ἴωνες ψιλωτικοὶ εἰσὶν - ἥλιος [50 written] γὰρ λέγουσι καὶ ἀπηλι- 


Ψ΄ > ἈΝ 3 I ef Ἂς \ 5 “ A 3 / 
@TNHS, οὐχὶ ἀφηλιώτη ς, ὥσπερ Kal TO LOTLOV καὶ ἐπίστιον. 











PRONUNCIATION. 111 


CONSONANTS. 


§ 53. 


There are sixteen consonant-sounds in Greek, 
represented Ὁ ΒΓ 4d ZOKAMNIIPST@¢X, 

The ancient grammarians divide the consonants 
into semivowels, ZH ¥AMNP YX, and mutes, 
BIA, KIIT, X @ ©; some, however, apply the 
term mute only to BI’ 4, K IIT. They subdivide 
the mutes into smooth, K II T, rough, X @ 6, and 
middle, I’ B Δ. ‘The consonants Z Ξὶ ¥ were called 
also double consonants. 

Aristotel. Poet. 20. Ἡμίφωνον δὲ τὸ μετὰ προσβολῆς ἔχον 
φωνὴν ἀκουστὴν, οἷον τὸ Σ καὶ τὸ P+ ἄφωνον δὲ τὸ μετὰ προσβολῆς 
καθ᾽ αὑτὸ μὲν οὐδεμίαν ἔχον φωνὴν, μετὰ δὲ τῶν ἐχόντων τινὰ φωνὴν 
γινόμενον ἀκουστὸν, οἷον τὸ Τ' καὶ τὸ Δ. 

Dionys. Thrax, 7, in Bekk. Anecd. Σύμφωνα δὲ τὰ λοιπὰ 
ἑπτακαίδεκα... .... Σύμφωνα δὲ λέγεται ὅτι αὐτὰ μὲν καθ᾽ ἑαυτὰ φωνὴν 
οὐκ ἔχει; συντασσόμενα δὲ μετὰ τῶν φωνηέντων φωνὴν ἀποτελεῖ. Τού- 
των ἡμίφωνα μὲν ὀκτὼ, ΖΈΨΛΜΝΡΣ. Ἡμίφωνα δὲ λέγεται 
ὅτι παρόσον ἧττον τῶν φωνηέντων εὔφωνα καθέστηκεν > ἔν τε τοῖς μυ- 
γμοῖς καὶ σιγμοῖς. Αφωνα δέ ἐστιν ἐννέα, BT AKIITO®X. Αφωνα 
δὲ λέγεται ὅτι μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἐστὶ κακόφωνα, ὥσπερ ἄφωνον λέγο- 
μεν τραγωιδὸν τὸν κακόφωνον. Τούτων δὲ ψιλὰ μὲν τρία, K IL T, δα- 
σέα δὲ τρία, Θ ᾧ Χ, μέσα δὲ τούτων τρία, BT A. Μέσα δὲ εἴρηται 
ὅτι τῶν μὲν ψιλῶν ἐστι δασύτερα, τῶν δὲ δασέων ψιλότερα...... Ἔτι 
δὲ τῶν συμφώνων διπλᾶ μέν ἐστι τρία, ΖΞ Ψ - διπλᾶ δὲ εἴρηται ὅτι ἕν 
ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἐκ δύο συμφώνων σύγκειται, τὸ μὲν Ζ ἐκ τοῦ Σ καὶ A, 
τὸ δὲ = ἐκ τοῦ K καὶ Σ, τὸ δὲ Ψ ἐκ τοῦ II καὶ Σ. 

Seat. adv. Gram. 1,5. Τῶν δὲ συμφώνων τὰ μὲν ἡμίφωνά ἐστι 
κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς [τοὺς γραμματικοὺς] τὰ δὲ ἄφωνα. Καὶ ἡμίφωνα μὲν, ὅσα 


2 


> ς cal r+ aA xX > 
dv αὑτῶν ροῖζον ἢ σιγμὸν ἢ μυγμὸν ἤ Twa παραπλήσιον ἦχον κατὰ 


112 PRONUNCIATION. 


τὴν ἐκφώνησιν ἀποτελεῖν πεφυκότα, καθάπερ τὸ ZOAMNEZPS 
ΦΧ Ψ, ἢ, ὥς τινες: χωρὶς τοῦ © καὶ ᾧ καὶ X, τὰ λειπόμενα ὀκτώ. 
ἔΛλφωνα δέ ἐστι τὰ μήτε συλλαβὰς καθ᾽ ἑαυτὰ ποιεῖν δυνάμενα μήτε 
ἤχων ἰδιότητας, αὐτὸ δὲ μόνον μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων συνεκφωνούμενα, καθά- 
περ ΒΤ Δ Κα ΠΎ, ἢ ὡς ἔνιοι, καὶ τὸ © @ Χ. Kat μὴν κοινῶς 
τῶν συμφώνων πάλιν τὰ μὲν φύσει δασέα λέγουσι, τὰ δὲ ψιλὰ - 
καὶ δασέα μὲν Θ ΦΧ, ψιλὰ δὲ ΚΠ Τ. Μόνον δὲ φασὶ τὸ P ἐπιδέ- 
χεσθαι ἑκάτερον, δασύτητα καὶ Ψψιλότητα. Λέγουσι δέ τινα τῶν συμ- 
φώνων καὶ διπλᾶ, καθάπερ τὸ Ζ Ξ Ψ" συνεστηκέναι γάρ φασι τὸ μὲν 


Ζ ἐκ τοῦ = καὶ Δ, τὸ δὲ & ἐκ τοῦ K καὶ Σ, τὸ δὲ Ψ ἐκ τοῦ II καὶ Σ. 


B. 


B, like 6. This sound is inferred from the defi- 
nition of a mute consonant given by Aristotle and 
Sextus. As to the definition of Dionysius Thrax, 
it proves nothing. In later times, it was sounded 
like the Roman V, which it was often employed to 
represent ; as, Verus, Bijpos or Οὐῆρος, Valerius, Ba- 
λέριος OL Οὐαλέριος, Severus, Σεβῆρος, Σεουῆρος, or 
Σευῆρος. 


σ΄ 


I, like g hard. ‘This, also, is inferred from Aris- 
totle’s and Sextus’s definition of a mute consonant. 
In later times, it had the sound of the Romaic 7; 
hence, in the Septuagint, it sometimes represents 
the Oriental Ain; as, Taga, Γαιβάλ, Toupopa. 

Before a palatal, Γ, K, X, & (that is, KX or X'), 
this letter denotes that nasal sound which lies be- 
tween N and I, that is, the sound of ng in hang ; 
as, ἄγγελος, dng-gelos, συγκαίω, sueng-katoh, Ayxi- 


PRONUNCIATION. 113 


ons, Ang-chee'-sés, Σφίγξ, Sphingks. This interme- 
diate sound was originally represented by N, as in 
Latin. 

When, however, κατά becomes xay- before y, as 
in καγγόνυ, both the yy are hard; thus, kag-goh- 
nue. 


Gell. 19,14. Inter literam Ν et G est alia vis, ut in nomine 
anguis et angaria et ancorae et increpat et incurrit et ingenuus. 
In omnibus verum his non verum JV sed adulterinum ponitur. 
Nam WV non esse lingua indicio est; nam si ea litera esset, 
lingua palatum tangeret. 


Ζ. 


A, like d. This, likewise, is inferred from Aris- 
totle’s and Sextus’s definition of a mute consonant. 
It is difficult to say when it began to have the 
Romaic sound; the probability, however, is, that 
these three mutes, B, Γ, 4, naturally followed the 
same analogy. 


Z. 


Z, like English z, but stronger. It has already 
been shown that Z is not a double consonant in the 
usual acceptation of the term double. We add 
here, that when it did not make position, as in Οἵ 
τε Ζάκυνθον, ἄστυ Zereins, it was sounded simply like 
the English z. 

Dionys. de Comp. 14. Τριῶν δὲ τῶν ἄλλων γραμμάτων, ἃ δὴ διπλᾶ 
καλεῖται, τὸ Ζ μᾶλλον ἡδύνει τὴν ἀκοὴν τῶν ἑτέρων - τὸ μὲν γὰρ & διὰ 
τοῦ K, τὸ δὲ Ψ διὰ τοῦ Π τὸν συριγμὸν ἀποδίδωσι, ψιλῶν ὄντων ἀμ- 
φοτέρων - τοῦτο δὲ ἡσυχηῖ τωῖ πνεύματι δασύνεται, καὶ ἔστι τῶν ὅμο- 


γενῶν γενναιότατον. 


10 ἢ 


114 PRONUNCIATION. 


See, also, Plat. Cratyl. p. 418 C, above quoted, § 50; 
Quintil. 12, 10, 27, above quoted, § 44. 


Θ. 
Θ, like th in thin, both. 


Kyu, aM, Ef. 
K, A, M, II, like k, 1, m, p, respectively. 


N. 

N, like n. Before a palatal, I, K, X, 2 (X or 
ΚΣ), in the same or two successive words, it had 
the nasal sound of ng in hang, which sound was 
also represented by I (ὃ 34). Before ἃ labial, 
IT, B, 6, ¥ ($5 or I>), N at the end of a word 
was often changed into M (§ 34). 


ht 
Ξ- 


Ξ, like ΚΣ or ΧΣ. In the Attic and Beeotic dia- 
lects, it had the sound of XX; in the other dialects, 
that of KS, or of x in siz, axe. In later times, the 
sound K3 prevailed; hence the statement of the 
grammarians, that & stands for ΚΣ. 


JE 
P, like r. The grammarians tell us that this let- 
ter 15 either rough or smooth; that at the beginning 
of a word it is aspirated, and when it is doubled, 
in the middle of a word, the first one has the 
smooth, and the second the rough, breathing ; that 
it is also aspirated after 0, 6, X in the same word ; 





ὁδόν... 


PRONUNCIATION. 115 


that after K, I, T, in the same word, it has the 
smooth breathing; and that the AXolians did not 
aspirate it. Now to aspirate the P is simply to 
roll it. ‘The rough breathing, therefore, over the 
P simply indicates the rolling sound of this letter, 
which the Romans expressed by annexing an h 
to it. 


>. 


Σ, like 8 in soft, past. Before M it was, in later 
times, sounded like Z, and was even changed into 
Z in writing; as, C. 1. n. 3032. 1003, 159. Ζμύρνα, 
Ζμυρναῖος. 

Lucian. Jud. Vocal. 9. “Ore δὲ ἀνεξίκακόν εἶμι γράμμα μαρτυ- 


ρεῖτέ μοι καὶ αὐτοὶ μηδέποτε ἐγκαλέσαντι Tat Ζῆτα σμάραγδον ἀπο- 


’ A ~ > / Ἁ ’ 
᾿σπάσαντι καὶ πᾶσαν ἀφελομένωι τὴν σμύρναν. 


Sext. adv. Gram. 1,9. Ὅταν σκεπτώμεθα πότερον διὰ τοῦ Ζ 
γραπτέον ἐστὶ τὸ ζμιλίον καὶ τὴν ζμύρναν ἢ διὰ τοῦ Σ. 

Herodian. Philetaer. p. 457; also in Hermann’s De Emen- 
dand. p. 305. Ζητεῖται πῶς γραπτέον TO Σ μύρνα, ἐπειδὴ τινὲς μετὰ 


τοῦ Ζ γράφουσιν αὐτό. 
Be 
T, like ¢ in tell, strong. 


Φ. 
Φ, like f, but stronger. 


Quintil. 1,4, 14. Et haec ipsa S litera ab his nominibus 
exclusa, in quibusdam ipsa alteri successit: nam mertare atque 
pultare dicebant : quin fordeum foedusque, pro aspiratione Vau 
simili litera utentes: nam contra Graeci aspirare solent, ut pro 


116 PRONUNCIATION. 


Fundanio Cicero testem, qui primam ejus literam dicere non 
posset, irridet. 

Priscian. p. 548, ed. Putsch. Hoc tamen scire debemus 
quod non tam fixis labris est pronuncianda F, quomodo PH; 
atque hoc solum interest inter F et PH. 


Αι: 
X, like Romaic y. 


~ 


W, like ΠΣ, 65. In the Attic, and perhaps in 
the Boeotic dialect, it had the sound of 3’; in the 
other dialects, that of ΠΣ. In later times the sound 
ΠΣ prevailed; hence the statement of the gram- 
marians, that ¥ stands for ΠΣ. 


§ 5A. 


When a consonant was doubled in pronunciation, 
it was doubled also in writing. 

When a short vowel was followed by a liquid, 
the A®olians lengthened the syllable by doubling 
that liquid ; as, ἄμμες, ἔστελλα, Borra. ‘The later 
Greeks often lengthened a syllable by doubling the 
consonant following its vowel; as, “IovAdos, Aowvia, 
Εὐριππίδης, Aodrmos. ‘They doubled a consonant, 
also, after a long syllable; as, λῆμμα for λῆμα. ‘This 
indiscriminate doubling of consonants was very 
common when the proper quantity of syllables be- 
gan to be disregarded ; that is, during the first three 
centuries of our era. 


PRONUNCIATION. 117 


Lucian. Pseudosoph. p. 563. Εἰπόντος δέ τινος “ Λῆμμα πά- 
ρεστιν αὐτωῖ," διὰ τῶν δύο MM, ““ Ovxody,” ἔφη, ““ λήψεται, εἰ 


λῆμμα αὐτωῖ πάρεστιν." 


SYNIZESIS,. 


§ 55. 


In case of synizesis, e and « were probably 
sounded like y in yes, you, or like h; o and υ, per- 
haps like wy; as, στήθεα ornOha, κρέα kpha, θεοί θῆῇοι, 
θεοῦ Ohov, ἡμέας nwyas, πόλιος πόλος, ἱερεύουσα ψερευ- 
ουσα, χρυσέωι ἀνά, xpualio ava ; ὄγδοον ὄγδιρον, δακρύ- 
ovat δακριροισι. It must not be supposed, however, 
that εν «, o, v, thus hardened, had the power of ordi- 
nary consonants, for they never affect the metre; 
thus, πόλψος is a pyrrhic, not an iambus. 


SYLLABICATION. 


§ 56. 


The question about the proper mode of dividing 
words into syllables was agitated during the time 
of Sextus (4. D. 190). It was finally settled by 
the Byzantine grammarians, whose rules are still 
followed by the modern Greeks and by the best 
continental editors. ‘This mode is essentially the 
same as that observed in the Herculanean papy- 
ruses and in all the manuscripts of the Byzantine 
period. In inscriptions a word is divided just 


118 PRONUNCIATION. 


where the line ends ; but as it was very difficult for 
the stone-cutter to follow any rule in this particu- 
lar, this fact proves nothing against the syllabica- 
tion of manuscripts. Sextus seems to attach very 
little importance to this subject; and the wits of 
his time maintained, that, as long as the meaning 
remained the same, it mattered not how a word 
was divided ; if, for instance, they said, Apiotiav 
by being divided Apic-tiav, and not Αρι-στίων, be- 
came Ζειπνίων, then it would be worth while to 
talk about the best mode of dividing it into sylla- 
bles. 


Sext. adv. Gram. 1,9. τὴν yap ὀρθογραφίαν φασὶν ἐν τρισὶ 
κεῖσθαι τρόποις, TOTOTNTL, ποιότητι, MEPLO POL. ....- Μερισμωῖ δὲ ἐπει- 
δὰν διαπορῶμεν περὶ τῆς ὄβριμος λέξεως, πότερόν ποτε τὸ Β τῆς 
δευτέρας ἐστὶ συλλαβῆς ἀρχὴ ἢ τῆς προηγουμένης πέρας. Καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ 


Αριστίων ὀνόματος ποῦ τακτέον τὸ Σ. 


ACCENT. 


§ 57. 


Strictly speaking, the Greek has but one accent, 
namely, the acute. Every unaccented syllable is 
said to have the grave. For instance, Θεόδωρος is 
@ccdwpos. ‘The grave accent merely denotes the 
absence of the acute. 

The acute did not materially differ from the Eng- 
lish accent; for example, the accent of λάέπεσθε, 
χαίρετε, ἤκουσεν, ὅρκων, βεβώς, was essentially the 
same as that of liberty, library, shoe’maker, com- 








PRONUNCIATION. 119 


pound, compose. At the end of a word before an- 
other word in the same sentence, the acute is less 
strong than it would be if the word stood by itself 
‘or at the end of a period; to express this weak 
acute, the grammarians employed the mark for the 
grave ; for example, in the expression, ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός, 
the accent of -vyp is not so strong as in ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ. 

The circumflex is compounded of the acute and 
the grave; that is, the first element of every cir- 
cumflexed syllable has the acute, and the second 
the grave ; for instance, μοῦσα, μῶσα are the same 
as poved, μώσὰ. 

When the acute is placed on a long syllable, the 
stress is laid upon the second element of that sylla- 
ble; thus, μούσης, μώσας are the same as μούσης, 
pocas. 

The difference between the acute and circum- 
flex was by no means trifling ; thus, ov, where, could 
in pronunciation be readily distinguished from ov, 

not, by the accent alone. So γαλήν ὁρῶ was pro- 
nounced differently from γαλῆν op. So οὔτις could 
be distinguished in pronunciation from ovis. 

In the A£olic dialect of Lesbos and AX®olis the 
accent is thrown as far back as the last syllable 
permits; that is, dissyllables, except prepositions 
and conjunctions, are accented on the penult; as, 
Borra, θῦμος, for θυμός, βουλή ; polysyllables, on the 
penult or antepenult; as, δύνατος, ἄεισι, ἀγρέθεντες, 


for δυνατός, ἀεῖσι, ἀγρεθέντες. 


- 


AAD PRONUNCIATION. 


Plat. Cratyl. 399 A, B. πρῶτον μὲν yap δὴ τὸ τοιόνδε δεῖ ἐν- 


νοῆσαι περὶ ὀνομάτων, ὅτι πολλάκις ἐπεμβάλλομεν γράμματα, τὰ δ' 





ἐξαιροῦμεν, παρ᾽ ὃ βουλόμεθα ὀνομάζοντες, καὶ τὰς ὀξύτητας μετα- 

pas βάλλομεν ;. Οἷον Ari φίλος" τοῦτο ἵνα ἀντὶ ponte ὄνομα ἡμῖν γένη- 
ται, τό τε ἕτερον ΤΥΡΊΩΝ Ιῶτα, SED oper Καὶ ἀντὶ ὀξείας τῆς μέσης « 
able “συλλαβῆς Bap εἴαν 1 ἀβδεγξάμεθα. "Ἄλλων. δὲ τοὐναντίον ἐμβάλλο- 
ee i cma τὰ δὲ β ΠΡΟΣ ΗῈ ΕΣ EP a φθεγγόμεθα. eee. ToUT@y 


ρήματος ὄνομα γέγονεν, ἑνὸς γράμματος τοῦ xe Ἔκ ΤῊ 9 teh καὶ βα- 


ρυτέρας τῆς τελευτῆς γενομένης. .. «..»- Ἐντεῦθεν δὴ “βόνον͵ τῶν θηρίων 


oe Fe ee | ee 


ὀρθῶς ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὠνομάσθη, Airis ἃ ὅπωπεν. "That is, 
the proper name Δίφιλος is formed from Ad φίλος by dropping 
the first I of Διί and removing the accent of φίλος : the word 
ἄνθρωπος is formed from the expression ἀναθρῶν ἃ ὄπωπεν by 
dropping the second A in ἀναθρῶν and removing the accent of 
-θρῶν. 

_. Aristotel. Rhetor. 8,1. Ἔστι δὲ αὐτὴ μὲν ἐν tnt φωνηῖ, πῶς 

᾿πκαύτηϊ δεῖ χρῆσθαι πρὸς ἕκαστον πάθος, οἷον πότε μεγάληι καὶ πότε 
μικραῖ καὶ πότε μέσηι, καὶ πῶς τοῖς τόνοις, οἷον ὀξείαι καὶ βαρείαι 
καὶ μέσηι. 


Id. Poet. 20. Ταῦτα δὲ διαφέρει σχήμασί τε τοῦ στόματος καὶ 





τόποις καὶ δασύτητι καί ψιλότητι καὶ μήκει καὶ βραχύτητι, é ἔτι δὲ καὶ 
! 7 
ὀξύτητι καὶ βαρύτητι καὶ τωῖ μέσωι. Curelinwn LL Ap, στ ννῤδία dual 
Id. ibid. 25. Kara δὲ προσωιδίαν, ὥσπερ Ἱππίας ἔλυεν 6 Θά- 
σιος τὸ “ δίδομεν δέ of,” καὶ ““ τὸ μὲν οὐ καταπύθεται ὄμβρωι.᾽" 
Id. Elench. 4. Τὸν Ὅμηρον ἔνιοι διορθοῦνται πρὸς τοὺς ἐλέγχον- 
ε Θ᾿ ἘΠ 4 ° , ςς \ \ τ ’, ΒΩ 42 , 
Tas ws ἀτόπως εἰρηκότα ““ τὸ μὲν οὗ καταπύθεται ὄμβρωι᾽" - λύουσι 
\ = Saal | “ Ol λέ A ᾿, > , ‘ A ‘ A 
yap αὐτὸ τηῖ προσωιδίαι, λέγοντες TO οὔ ὀξύτερον. Kai τὸ περὶ τὸ 
ἐνύπνιον τοῦ Αγαμέμνονος, ὅτι οὐκ αὐτὸς ὁ Ζεὺς εἶπεν ““ δίδομεν δέ οἱ 
εὖχος ἀρέσθαι.) ἀλλὰ Tat ἐνυπνίωι ἐνετέλετο διδόναι. That δίδο- 
ev, first person plural, differed from διδόμεν, infinitive, in pro- 
μεν, μεν, ἢ 
nunciation. 
Dionys. Thrax, 3, in Bekker’s Anecdota, p. 629. Τόνος ἐστὶ 
φωνῆς ἀπήχησις ἐναρμονίου, ἢ κατὰ ἀνάτασιν ev Tht ὀξείαι, ἢ κατὰ 


ς \ , Lad / Ε A ; 3 ~ / 
ὁμαλισμὸν ev THt βαρείαι, ἢ κατὰ περίκλασιν ἐν τη περισπωμένηι. 


ila ia 


_ PRONUNCIATION. 121] 


a7 
brad 


Dionys. de ae 11. οὐ μὴν ἅπασά ye ἡ λέξις ἡ καθ᾽ ἕν 
΄ > - ie 8 ‘ = SY τῷ a > , 

μόριον ταττομένη τῆς αὐτῆς λέγεται τάσεως " GAN ἡ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς ὀξεί- 
ας ἡ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῆς βαρείας, ἡ δ᾽ er ἀμφοῖν" τῶν δ᾽ ἀμφοτέρας τὰς 
τάσεις ἐχουσῶν αἱ μὲν κατὰ μίαν συλλαβὴν συνεφθαρμένον ἔχουσι τωῖ 
ὀξεῖ τὸ βαρὺ, ἃς δὴ περισπωμένας καλοῦμεν... . .. Καὶ ταῖς μὲν 
δισυλλάβοις οὐδὲν τὸ διὰ μέσον χωρίον βαρύτητος καὶ ὀξύτητος: 
ταῖς δὲ πολυσυλλάβοις, οἷαί ποτ᾽ ἂν ὦσιν, ἡ τὸν ὀξὺν τόνον ἔχουσα μία 

ες ἐν πολλαῖς βαρείαις, ἔνεστιν.. 

i ἄρον Plutarch. Thes. 1, p. 12 τ΄ Καταλιπεῖν δὲ καὶ σὺν αὐτοῖς “Ep- 

47, μον, ἄνδρα τῶν Αθήνησιν εὐπατρειδῶν - ἀφ᾽ οὗ καὶ τόπον Ἑρμοῦ 
καλεῖν Οἰκίαν τοὺς Πυθοπολίτας, οὐκ ὀρθῶς τὴν δευτέρωι συλλαβὴν 

~ ἈΝ \ , 5." ἃ, \ Ja & “εὖ 7, 

περισπῶντας, καὶ τὴν δόξαν ἐπὶ θεὸν ἀπὸ ἥρωος μετατιθέντας. 

Sext. adv. Gram. 1,5. Αλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ οὐ δύο μόνον ὑπειλήφασιν = 
εἶναι προσωιδίας γραμματϊκῶν παῖδες, τήν τε μακρὰν καὶ βραχεῖαν, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ ὀξεῖαν, βαρεῖαν, περισπωμένην, δασεῖαν, ψιλὴν, 
ἕκαστον τῶν ὑποδεδειγμένων φωναέντων ἔχον τινὰ τούτων κατ᾽ ἰδίαν 
προσωιδίαν γενήσεται στοιχεῖον, te 

Kd 

B. A. p. 674. Προσωιδίαι | εἰσὶ Sad ὀξεῖα, βαρεῖα, περι- 
σπωμένη, μακρὰ, βραχεῖα, δασεῖα, ψιλή, ἀπόστροφος, ὑφὲν, ὑποδια- 
στολή. Τούτων εἰσὶ σημεῖα τάδε- ὀξεῖα ΄, οἷον Ζεύς, βαρεῖα *, 

οἷον Πὰν, περισπωμένη, ~, οἷον πῦρ. 

Ibid. p. 684. ““ Τόνος οὖν ἐστὶν ἐπίτασις ἢ ἄνεσις ἢ μεσότης συὰ- 
λαβῶν εὐφωνίαν ἔχουσα." Td μὲν οὖν ἐπίτασις ἐτέθη ἐν Twi ὁρι- 
oper διὰ τὴν ὀξεῖαν, τὸ δὲ a ἄνεσις “ba τὴν βαρεῖαν, τὸ δὲ μεσ ό- 
της διὰ τὴν περισπωμένην. 

“ Καὶ ἔστι πάλιν ἡ μὲν ὀξεῖα ποιότης συλλαβῆς ἐπιτεταμένον 
ἔχουσα φθόγγον, ἡ δὲ βαρεῖα ποιότης συλλαβῆς ἀνειμένον ἔχουσα 
φθόγγον, ἡ δὲ περισπωμένη ποιότης συλλαβῆς συνημμένον ἢ κεκλα- 

’, -᾿ ’ 39 > \ ΄ A ,ὕ Ἢ 
σμένον ἔχουσα φθόγγον." Ἐἶπε δὲ συνημμένον τὸν μετέχοντα καὶ 
ὀξείας καὶ βαρείας, κεκλασμένον δὲ τὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀξέος ἐπὶ τὸ βαρὺ 
ρέποντα. 

Ibid. p. 685. ‘O δὲ Κοὶϊντιλιανὸς Ἀριστείδης ἐν τωῖ Περὶ Μουσικῆς 

, , > , ” , » , A Sos 4 
πρώτωι, δύο εἶναί φησιν εἴδη τάσεως, ἄνεσίν τε καὶ ἐπίτασιν. Καὶ 
» \ > , cr. F x a ' > / , Ἂν ΣᾺ, ᾽ὔ 
ἄνεσιν μὲν εἶναι λέγει, ἡνίκα ἂν ἀπὸ ὀξυτέρου τόνου ἐπὶ βαρύτερον 
ἡ φωνὴ χωρηῖ, ἐπίτασιν δὲ, ὅταν ἐκ βαρυτέρου μεταβαίνηι πρὸς ὀξύτε- 


11 


122 PRONUNCIATION. 


pov. Ex δὴ τούτων τὰ γινόμενα τὸ μὲν βαρύτονον τὸ δὲ ὀξύτονον 
προσαγορεύομεν. 

Ibid. p. 688. ““ Ἢ γὰρ βαρεῖα συλλαβικὸς τόνος ἐστί, τουτέστιν 
εἰς τὴν συλλαβὴν τὴν μὴ ἔχουσαν τὸν κύριον τόνον ἐπιτίθεται.᾽"....... 
Ἦν γὰρ κανὼν 6 λέγων ὅτι πᾶσα συλλαβὴ, xopis τῆς συλλαβῆς τῆς 


ἐχούσης τὸν κύριον τόνον, τὴν βαρεῖαν ἐπιδέχεται, οἷον Θὲέόδὼρὸς. 


Ibid. p. 689. “ Εἰς τὸν témov τῆς ὀξείας τὸν τελευταῖον τίθεται pe" 
7 f- 


[ἡ βαρεῖα], ., oo οἷον ὡς ἐπὶ παραδείγματος ἐὰν εἴπηις “ Ὃ δεῖνα καλὸς 
ἄνθρωπος, ἢ ἰδοὺ εἰς τὸ Nos ἐτέθη ἡ βαρεῖα, .. ... ἐὰν δὲ εἴπηις “ Οὗτος 
ἄνθρωπος καλός," εἰς TO AOS πεσεῖται ἡ ὀξεῖα." 

Ibid. p. 685. ““ Ἢ ὀξεῖα ἔχει τόπους τρεῖς, ὀξύτονον, παροξύτονον, 
καὶ προπαροξύτονον. Τὴν ὀξεῖάν φησι τίθεσθαι ἐπὶ τριῶν συλλαβῶν, 
wee. Kal ὅταν μὲν τιθῆται ἐπὶ τέλους, τότε λέγομεν ὀξύνεσθαι τὴν 
λέξιν - ὅταν δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πρὸ μιᾶς συλλαβῆς τοῦ τέλους, παροξύτονον 
“ ΄' A ͵΄ A , ΄ o 3. “tha 
ἅμα λέγομεν τὴν λέξιν καὶ βαρύτονον, παροξύτονον ὅτι ἐπὶ τῆς παραλη- 
γούσης τίθεται ἡ ὀξεῖα, βαρύτονον δὲ ὅτι ἐπὶ τέλους τίθεται ἡ βαρεῖα " 

ἡ \ 4 \ > -~ \ A “A / ’ Φ᾿ c 
καὶ yap μετὰ τὴν ὀξεῖαν τὴν πρὸ τοῦ τέλους τιθεμένην ἐτίθετο ἡ Ba- 
peta οἷον τὸ Aids καλεῖται καὶ παροξύτονον καὶ Bapvtovoy...... Ei 
δὲ πρὸ δύο συλλαβῶν τοῦ τέλους τεθείη ἡ ὀξεῖα, τότε ἡ λέξις λέγεται 
καὶ προπαροξύτονος καὶ βαρύτονος, . . . . . οἷον Θὲόδ ὡρὸς. 

Ibid. p. 686. Μακρᾶς οὔσης ἐπὶ τέλους οὐ δύναται προπαροξυν- 
θῆναι λέξις - ἢ ὅτι ἡ μακρὰ φορτίου τάξιν ἔχει καὶ Bdpouvs...... 

‘ Ἡ περισπωμένη τόπους ἔχει δύο, περισπώμενον καὶ προπερισπώ- 
pevoy.” ..... Οὐ δύναται ἡ περισπωμένη πρὸ δύο συλλαβῶν τεθῆναι, 
3 A > δ “2 , 3 > , >’ ,ὔ .ς A > ἰοὺ ΎΦ 
ἐπειδὴ ἀπὸ κράσεώς ἐστιν ὀξείας καὶ βαρείας - ἡ γὰρ ὀξεῖα καὶ ἡ βα- 
ρεῖα συνελθοῦσαι ἀπετέλεσαν τὴν περισπωμένην. 

Ibid. p. 95. Τῶν δὲ τόνων οἱ μέν εἰσιν ὁ ξεῖς, οἱ δὲ βαρεῖς" 
ε A , » ’,ὔ 5 3 > »“ 

ὁ γὰρ περισπώμενος σύνθετός ἐστιν ἐξ ἀμφοῖν. 

V. A. 2, p. 103. Ἡ γοῦν προσωιδία τάσις ἐστὶ φωνῆς ποιὰ, ἤγουν 
ποιότητά τινα ἔχουσα ἤχου " ἢ γὰρ ἐπιτεταμένη ἐστὶν ἢ ἀνειμένη 
a , 

ἢ μέση. 
Schol. ad Eurip. Or. 269. Κεκωμωίδηται ὁ στίχος διὰ Ἡγέλοχον 
τὸν ὑποκριτὴν " οὐ γὰρ φθάσαντα διελεῖν τὴν συναλοιφὴν, ἐπιλείψαν- 
~ , “ 5 7 A “ , 7 A ΄- 
τος τοῦ πνεύματος, τοῖς ἀκροωμένοις τὴν γαλῆν δόξαι λέγειν τὸ ζῶον, 
> > 7 . . 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ τὰ yadnvd. The Scholiast here means to say, that in 





δε 





Ajai aaa lb χων... 





PRONUNCIATION. 123 


the verse, Ex κυμάτων yap αὖθις αὖ γαλήν᾽ ὁρῶ, Hegelochus, for 
want of breath, divided yadnv-épa, instead of yadn-vépd. The 
probability, however, is, that he pronounced γαλήν᾽ with the 
circumflex, γαλῆν, which coincided with the accusative of γαλῆ, 
acat. So that, in the Frogs of Aristophanes, this verse should 
be written, Ex κυμάτων yap αὖθις αὖ γαλῆν ὁρῶ. 

§ 85, Ἃ 


The last syllable being long, no accent can be 
placed on the antepenult. As to the acute on the 
antepenult, or the circumflex on the penult, of 
words ending in -az, -o., this apparent anomaly is ex- 
plained as follows. ‘The I in these diphthongs, at 
the end of a word, had an obscure or weak sound ; 
that is, it was scarcely audible : but when it was 
an essential or characteristic letter, as in the dative 
or optative, its sound was clear or strong ; for in- 
stance, in οἴκοι, at home, an old dative, the last I 
was more distinctly heard than in οἶκοι, houses. 
The Doric dialect, however, follows the general rule 
even in this case; as, φιλοσόφοι, φορείται, for φιλό- 
cool, φορεῖται. 

The endings -ews of the second declension, -ew 
of the Ionic genitive, and -εως, -ewv of the genitive 
of some classes of nouns of the third declension, per- 
mit the accent to stand on the antepenult, because 
these endings were ordinarily pronounced, by syn- 
1ZeSIS, “YOS, -YW, -YOV. So ὅτεων for ὅτων. Conse- 
quently, this anomaly also is only apparent. 

The compounds of γέλως and κέρας, as φιλόγελως, 


124 PRONUNCIATION. 


εὐρύκερως, ordinarily suffered a kind of syncope ; thus, 
pidoy as, EUPUK pws. 


§ 59. 


The invention of most of the prosodiacal marks 
has been attributed to Aristophanes, the gramma- 
rian, who flourished about two hundred years be- 
fore Christ. | 

The mark for the acute is ("), for the grave (*). 
The most ancient form of the circumflex is (*), 
that is, the acute and grave united into one form; 
which, being slightly modified, produced the later 
forms (7); and (~), all of which are found in man- 
uscripts. 


Villois. Prolegomen. ad Iliad. p. x11. Oi χρόνοι καὶ οἱ τόνοι 
καὶ τὰ πνεύματα, Ἀριστοφάνους ἐκτυπώσαντος, γέγονε πρὸς διάκρισιν 
τῆς ἀμφιβόλου λέξεως. 

V. 4. 2, p. 107. ‘H ὀξεῖα συναπτομένη ri βαρείαι τύπον ἀπο- 
τελοῦσιν οἷον A. 

Ibid. 2, p. 108. Τὸ γὰρ A διαιρούμενον εἰς δύο ποιεῖ ὀξεῖαν καὶ 
βαρεῖαν. 

B. A. p. 756. τΤὸ σημεῖον τοῦ τόνου τούτου [τῆς περισπωμένης 
ἅμα ἄνεισι καὶ κάτεισι; .... -. οὗτος ὁ τόνος δοκεῖ σύνθετος εἶναι, ὥσπερ 
καὶ τὸ σημεῖον ἐλέγχει, συγκείμενον ἐξ ὀξείας καὶ βαρείας. 

Ibid. p. "757. Ἣ περισπωμένη ταύτης ἔτυχε τῆς προσηγορίας - 
ἔοικε γὰρ τωῖ σχήματι περικεκλασμένη ράβδωι, ἐχούσηι δύο ἀρχὰς νευ- 
οὔσας εἰς ἀλλήλας. 

Ibid. p. 683. Αἱ δὲ ἑπτὰ προσωιδίαι ἀπὸ στοιχείων τὴν γένεσιν 
ἔχουσιν " ἡ μὲν γὰρ ὀξεῖα καὶ βαρεῖα ἀπὸ τοῦ A στοιχείου, ἡ δὲ περι- 
σπωμένη καὶ ἡ μακρὰ καὶ ἡ βραχεῖα ἀπὸ τοῦ ©. This description of 
the circumflex has reference to the form (7). 





ae 125 


§ 60. 


The Latin also has three accents, the acute (’), 
grave (°), and circumflex (*), and, in accentuation, 
it follows the analogy of the Greek, except that, 

(a) In general, no Latin word has the accent 
on the last syllable, and in this respect the Latin 
coincides with the A£olic dialect. 

(b) In dissyllabic words, the accent is put on 
the penult ; as, déa, θεώ, Gngo, ἄγχω, sémnus, ὕπνος, 
intus, ἐντός, paean, παιάν, CONUS, κῶνος, CENSUS, κῆν- 

σος, musa, μοῦσα. 

(c) In words of more than two syllables, the 
accent 15 put on the penult, if it is long either by 
nature or by position ; the acute is put on the ante- 
penult, if the penult is short ; as, Homérus, “Ὅμηρος, 
Athénae, AOjva, Hyméttus, Ὕμηττός, smardgdus, 
σμάραγδος, historia, ἱστορία. 

But vocatives like Virgili, Mercuri, and genitives 
like tugurt, retain their original accent; thus, Vir- 
gili, Mercuri, tuguri. In this, the Latin coincides 
with the Doric ; compare such forms as ἐτρέχον, 
ἐλάβον, ἐκοσμήθεν, ἀνέθεν, with the accent of the ori- 
ginal ἐτρέχοσαν, ἐλάβοσαν, ἐκοσμήθησαν, ἀνέθεσαν. 

(4) A monosyllable takes the acute, if its vowel 
is short by nature ; as, pix, fax; if its vowel is long 
by nature, it takes the circumflex ; as, dds, das, 
MUS, μῦς. 

Quintil. 1, 5. In omni voce, acuta intra numerum trium 

Li 


126 PRONUNCIATION. 


syllabarum continetur, sive eae sunt in verbo solae, sive ulti- 
mae: et in his aut proxima extremae, aut ab ea tertia. Trium 
porro, de quibus loquor, media longa, aut acuta, aut flera erit : 
eodem loco brevis utique gravem habebit sonum, ideoque posi- 
tam ante se, id est ab ultima tertiam, acuet. Est autem in omni 
voce utique acuta, sed nunquam plus una; nec ultima unquam; 
ideoque in disyllabis prior. Praeterea nunquam in eadem flexa 
et acuta, quoniam eadem flexa et acuta ; itaque neutra claudet 
vocem Latinam. Ea vero, quae sunt syllabae unius, erunt 
acuta, aut flexa, ne sit aliqua vox sine acuta. 

Priscian. de Accent.2. Accentus namque acutus ideo in- 
ventus est, quod acuat sive elevet syllabam. Gravis ideo, quod 
deprimet aut deponat. Circumflecus ideo, quod deprimat et 
ACUGL SS. wis Quid est circumflexus ? Nota de acuto et gravi 
facta ita*......Notandum etiam, quod acutus accentus duo 
loca habet, penultimum et antepenultimum, apud Graecos au- 
tem penultimum, antepenultimum, et ultimum. Circumflexus 
autem penultimum tantum. Ponitur namque gravis vel cum 
acuto vel circumflexo in eadem dictione, sed non tamen in 
eadem syllaba. Observatur namque unus accentus in inte- 
gris dictionibus, ut Romanus, Hispanus......Syllaba quoque, 
quae correptam vocalem habet, acuto accentu pronuntiatur, ut 
pax, fax, pix, nix, nix, dix. Quae etiam tali accentu pronun- 
cianda est, quamvis sit longa positione, quia naturaliter brevis 
est. Quae vero naturaliter est longa, circumflexo accentu ex- 
primanda est, ut rés, dés, spés, vds. Disyllabae vero dictio- 
nes, quae priorem productam habent et posteriorem correp- 
tam, priorem syllabam circumflectunt, ut Méta, Créta, Roma. 
oie Trisyllabae namque et tetrasyllabae et deinceps, si pe- 
nultimam correptam habuerint, antepenultimam acuto accentu 
proferunt, ut Tullius, Hostilius. Nam penultima, si positione 
longa fuerit, acuetur, antepenultima vero gravabitur, ut Catél- 
lus, Metéllus...... Syllaba vero ultima si brevis fuerit et pe- 
nultimam naturaliter longam habuerit, ipsam penultimam cir- 


A A . . . a 
cumflectet, ut Cethégus, perdsus. Ultima vero si naturaliter ~ 


longa fuerit, penultimam acuet, ut Athénae, Mycénae. 





3 
4 
A 








PRONUNCIATION. 127 


Id. 7, 5, p. 739. Juniores autem gaudentes brevitate per 
abscissionem extremae protulerunt pro Virgilie Virgili, et pro 
Mercurie Mercuri..... . Unde accentus perfecti vocativi in his 
servatur. 

Id. de Duodecim Vers. Aen. 13. Omnia in us desinentia se- 
cundae declinationis in e faciunt vocativum, exceptis propriis, 
quae ὁ habent ante us, quae per apocopam proferunt vocativum, 
ut Virgilius Virgili pro Virgilie, et Mercuri pro Mercurie 
(ideoque accentus manet penultimus, quamvis brevis sit penulti- 
ma syllaba,.....sic etiam tuguri pro tugurii acutum debet 
habere ). ) 

Gell. 13, 25. Voculatio qui poterit servari, si non sciemus 
tm in nominibus, ut Valeri, utrum interrogandi an vocandi sint ? 

nam interrogandi secunda syllaba superiore tono est quam 
prima: deinde novissima dicitur. At in eam vocandi summo 
tono est prima ; deinde gradatim discendunt. 

Victorin. Gram. 17. Acutus cum apud Graecos tria loca 
teneat, ultimam et ei proximam syllabam et antepenultimam ;__ 
apud nos duobus tantum locis poni potest: aut in penultima 
syllaba, ut praelegistis ; aut in ,ea quae a fine est tertia, ut 
praelégimus. Circumflexts, 8 | pars ¢ 6rationis trium aut amplius 
fuerit syllabarum, non nisi in penultima locum poterit invenire, 
ut perturbare, docére. 

Isid. Orig. 17, 2. 8. Acutus accentus dictus, quod acuat et 
erigat syllabam, gravis, quod deprimat et deponat. Est enim 
contrarius acuto circumflexus, quia de acuto et gravi constat : 
incipiens enim ab acuto in gravem desinit...... Acutus autem 
et circumflexus similes sunt; nam uterque levat syllabam. 
Gravis contrarius videtur ambobus ; nam semper deprimit syl- 
labas, cum illi levent. 

Diomed. de Art. Gram. p. 425, ed. Putsch. Accentus est 
acutae vel gravis vel inflexae orationis datio, vocisve intentio 
vel inclinatio, acuto aut inflexo sono regens verba...... Sunt 
vero tres, acutus, gravis, et qui ex duobus factus est, circum- 
flecus. Ex his acutus in correptis semper, interdum productis 


128 PRONUNCIATION. 


syllabis versatur: inflexus in his quae producuntur. Gravis 
autem per se nunquam consistere in ullo verbo potest, sed in 
his, in quibus inflexus est, aut acutus, caeteras syllabas obtinet. 
In Graecis itaque dictionibus cum acutus tria loca teneat, ulti- 
mum, penultimum, et antepenultimum. 

Donat. 1, 5, 1, p. 1740, ed. Putsch. Acutus, cum in Grae- 
cis dictionibus tria loca teneat, ultimum, penultimum, et ante- 
penultimum, tenet apud Latinos penultimum et antepenultimum, 
ultimum nunquam. 


According to the Latin grammarians, when a 
Greek word, not thoroughly Latinized, was written 
in Latin letters, it retained its Greek accent, with 
this modification, that, if the last syllable of an oxy- 
tone was long, it received the circumflex in Latin. 
This, however, seems to have applied only to oxy- 
tones and perispomena; as, Thyds, Ovas, Nais, 
Nais, Themist6, Θεμιστώ, Calyps6, Καλυψώ, Atrets, 
Arpeus. 


Quintil. 1, 5. Aut flexa pro gravi, ut apice circumducta 
frequente, quam ex duabus syllabis in unam cogentes, et de- 
inde flectentes, dupliciter peccant. Sed id saepius in Graecis 
nominibus accidit: ut Atreuws, quem nobis juvenibus doctis- 
simi senes acuta prima dicere solebant, ut necessario secunda 
gravis esset; item Terei, Nereique. 

Victorin. Art. Gram. 17, p. 1943, ed. Putsch. Graeca no- 
mina si iisdem literis proferuntur, Graecos accentus habebunt ; 
nam cum dicimus Thyas, Nais, acutum habebit posterior 
accentum; et cum Themisto, Calypso, Theano, ultimam cir- 
cumflecti videbimus. Quod utrumque Latinus sermo non pati- 
tur, nisi admodum raro, ut sola occurrit ergé conjunctio, in qua 
posterior circumflexa deprehenditur. 





PRONUNCIATION. 129 


Donat. 1, 5, 2, p. 1741. Sane Graeca verba Graecis ace 
centibus melius afferimus. 

The Greeks, when they wrote Roman names in 
Greek letters, accented them as if they were Greek 
words; as, Tpaiavos, Αὔγουστος, Κικέρων, after the 
analogy of Σαρδιανός, εὔρωστος, Ἀχέρων. 

(:» 


Ζ f 

Ores til gia 

A proclitic i is a word, which, with respect to ac- 

cent, is pronounced as if it were a part of the word 
before which it stands. 

The proclitics are, all the forms of the pee 
the prepositions, the adverbs ov, οὐκ, οὐχ, ὡς, and the 
conjunctions ἀλλά, ἠδέ or ἰδέ, Kai, οὐδέ, μηδέ, Some 
grammarians recognize only εἰ, εἰς, ἐς, ἐν, εἰν, ἐξ, ἐκ, 
οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ, ὡς, ὁ, ἡ; οἱ, at as proclitic; the following 

ἔδοίβ, however, show that all the above-mentioned 
classes of words are proclitic : 

(a) Prepositions and the above-mentioned oxy- 
tone conjunctions lose their accent when the last 
vowel is elided, which shows that that accent was 
Weak ; as, wap ἐμοί, ἀλλ᾽ ἐμέ, μηδ᾽ αὐτόν. 

(0) The forms of the article ending in a vowel, 
together with the conjunction καί, are often con- 
tracted, by crasis, with the following word, thereby 
losing their accent ; as, ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτό, Kayo, καἶτα. 

(c) In the Molic dialect, dissyllabic prepositions 
and conjunctions are oxytone, although in that dia- 


ΞΖ “2 § Gl, 22 ay eatin fe ae 


130 PRONUNCIATION. 


lect the accent is generally thrown as far back as 
the last syllable permits ; as, veda, not πέδα. 

(d) According to the ancient grammarians, 
when the article has the force of the demonstrative 
pronoun, it is read with a strong accent; for in- 
stance, 6, in the expression, ὁ yap βασιλῆϊ χολωθείς, 
is to be read 6. 

Add to these facts the analogy of the Romaic and 
other modern languages. 

Eustath. p. 22. Ta προτακτικὰ ἄρθρα στερηθέντα τῶν ὑποτετα- 
γμένων αὐτοῖς ὀνομάτων σφοδρότερόν τε ἐκφωνοῦνται κατὰ τοὺς τόνους, 


/ 
καὶ els ἀντωνυμίας μεταβάλλονται. 


§ 62. 

An enclitic is pronounced as if it were a part of 
the preceding word; as, ἐγώ φημι, πολλοῖς τισιν, 
σοφός τίς, τούτου γε, πόσος τις, pronounced ἐγώφημι, 
πολλοίστισιν, σοφόστις, τούτουγε, πόσοστις. 

When the accent of the enclitic is placed on the 
last syllable of the preceding word, the first accent 
is stronger than the second; as, ἄνθρωπός τις, δεῖξόν 
μοι, οὗτός ἐστιν, οὐδέποτε ἐστί σφισιν, pronounced 
ἄνθρωπὸστις, δεῖξονμοι, οὗτοσεστιν, οὐδέποτεεστὶ σφισιν. 

The Latin has only three enclitics, que, ne, ve, 
as, itaque or itaque, veneruntne, carbombisve. 

Priscian. de Accent.2. Sunt quidem tres syllabae, in quibus 
accentus corrumpitur, que, ne, ve, ut itdque, quando adverbium 


sit, nam tfaque, quando conjunctio est, dicimus. Venerintne 
ad vos? Carbonibisve. 














PRONUNCIATION. 131 


) § 68. 


Most of the Hellenists of Western Europe pro- 
nounce Greek words with the Latin accent, which 
practice very often violates the rules of Greek ac- 
centuation. ‘This is owing partly to the prepon- 
derance of the Latin language in that part of Eu- 
rope, and partly to negligence. So that what is 
called reading Greek according to quantity is noth- 
ing more than reading one language with the 
accent of another. As to quantity, strictly so called, 
that is, the χρόνος of the Greeks, it is generally dis- 
regarded by all modern nations. ‘Thus, the modern 
Greeks retain the τόνοι and pay no regard to the 
χρόνοι; the Western nations, in reading Greek, 
often violate both the τόνοι and the χρόνοι; in 
reading Latin, they violate only the χρόνοι. 


§ 64. 

In all the modern European languages, the 
rhythm of a verse depends on the accent of each 
individual word; that is, the metrical ictus falls 
upon an accented syllable ; consequently, the quan- 
tity of syllables, if recognized at all, has no influ- 
ence in versification. ‘This is evidently the most 
obvious law of rhythm. ‘The Greeks, however, dis- 
regarded the rhythm of accent, as less musical, and 
regulated the structure of their verse by the quan- 
tity of each syllable. Consequently, in classical 
Greek, the metrical accent or ictus may fall upon 


Ope del 4 FOC RE 


132 PRONUNCIATION. 


an unaccented syllable, and a word may have more 
than one metrical accent or no accent at all; as, 


TROCHAIC. 


‘ARN ανάἀμνησθέντες, ὦνδρες, 
Τῆς διαίτης τής παλαίας 
“ 75 i gar p cf 
Hy παρείχ αὑτὴ ποθ᾽ ἥμιν 
Tov τε πάλασιών εκείνων 
Τῆήνδε viv 
Τήν θεόν προσείπατε. 
΄Ω γερόντες Ηλιάσται, φράτορές τριώβολού 
ed / / f / / Μ Vi 
Ovs εγὼ Bookw κεκράγως καί δικαία Kadixa, 

/ 7 «“ 623 / ΄ / 7 7ὔ 
Παραβοήθειθ᾽ ὡς ὑπ᾽ ἄνδρων τύπτομαί ξυνωμοτῶν. 
/ ωλ Λ Ve / J ¢ / / 

AO) βαθύζωνὼων ανάσσα Πέρσιδων ὑπερτατῆή, 

Μήτερ ἣ n Bepfou γεραία, χαΐρε Δἀρειού γυναί" : 

Θεού μεν εὐνατείρα Πέ ἐρσων Θεού δε καί μητήρ εφύς. 
Twi yap είκος ἄνδρα ae ἥλικόν Θουκύδιδήν. 


“DACTYLIC. 


/ 
DQ γενεθλά γενναίων, 
¢/ 3 7 / Pde 
Het ἐμῶν καματων παραμύθιον. 
Oisa τε καί ξυνιήμι Tad, οὔτι με 

/ 
Φύγγανει, οὐδ᾽ εθελώ προλυπεὶν τοδε. 


Μήνιν acide, θεώ, Πηλήϊαδεώ Αχιλήος 
Οὐλομενήν, ἡ pope Axatous anye εθήκεν. 
Πόλλας δ᾽ ἰφθιμούς ψυχάς Aisi προϊάψεν 
“Ἡρωών, αυτούς δὲ ἑλώρια τεύχε κυνέσσιν, 
Οἰωνοίσι τε πάσι" 4ιός δ᾽ ετελείετο βούλη. 


IAMBIC. 


Anunrep, ἃ ἅγνων ὀργιών 
Ανάσσα σύμπαράστατεί, 
Ka σώξε τόν σαυτής χορόν " 
Ka μ᾽ ἀσφαλώς πανήμερον 
Παισαί τε καί χορεύσαι. 





‘ Gosacteset<¢ a 2.552...“ 


PRONUNCIATION. 133 


Χθονός μεν ἔς τηλούρον ἥκομέν πεδόν, 
Σ᾿ κυθήν ες οἶμον αβάτον εἴς ερήμιάν, 
ε / / , / δ. 2... £ 
Haare, cot δε χρὴ μελείν επίστολάς. 
2Q Zev βασιλεύ, τὸ χρήμα τῶν νυκτών ὁσόν 
Arrepavrov: οὐδεποθ᾽ ἥμερά γενήσεταί ; 
‘Ds ἥδυ καίνοις πρώγμασίν και δέξιοίς ὁμίλειν, 
Και τών καθέστωτών νομών ὑπέρφρονείν δυνάσθαί. 
ANAPESTIC. 
οὐ τὸ Νὺν οὖν χρησθών ὁ τι βούλονταί. 
Τουτί το γ᾽ εμόν cap αὐτοισίν 
Παρεχώ τυπτείν, πεινήν, διψήν. 
Ευφήμειν χρή τον πρέσβυτήν και τῆς ευχής ὑπακούειν " 
2 δέσποτ᾽ ανάξ, αμετρήτ᾽ Anp, ὁς εχείς τὴν γήν μετεώρον. 
Sometimes the metrical ictus accidentally coin- 
cides with the accent of the word ; as, | 


“Ἐν τηῖ one νυνὶ λαχὸν τὸ γράμμα σου δικάξειν. 


Τῆς babe aE λαθόντ᾽ ἐκλέψαμεν τὸν ὅλμον. 
ἘΠΕ wo »-{ τ ool 
Τοὺς εὐρυπρώκτους ε΄ τούτονί 


Γοῦν οἷδ᾽ ἐγὼ κἀκεινονί 
Καὶ τὸν κομήτην τουτονί. 
Τί δῆθ᾽ ἐρεῖς ; 
Ἡττήμεθ᾽, ὦ κινούμενοι. 

During the last age of the Greek language, the 
rhythm of a verse generally depended on the accent 
of each individual word. ‘This is particularly the 
case with the metrical τροπάρια (that is, στροφαί) of 
the ritual of the Greek Church, which, however, are 
printed as if they were not metrical compositions. 
The following τροπάρια are divided and accented as 


they are chanted at the present day : 
12 


134 PRONUNCIATION. 


(To the tune of ““ Ράβδος ἐκ τῆς ρίζης Ἰεσσαί." 


Ὃν πάλαι προείπεν Ιακώβ 

Ἐθνών απεκδοχήν, Χριστέ, 

Φυλής Τούδα εξανέτειλας, 

Και δύναμιν Δαμασκού 

Σαμαρείας σκύλα τε 

ἬΝλθες προνομεύσας πλάνην τρέπων εἰς 
πίστιν θεοπρεπή " 

Δόξα tnt δυνάμει σου, Κύριε. 


(To the tune of ““ Διὰ βρώσεως ἐξήγαγε.) 


Ἐπονείδιστον ὑπέμεινας 

Πάθος, Χριστέ, και τα ονείδη ἡμών 
Πάντα αφείλου, ἀγαθέ, 

Και της ἄνω βασιλείας ἡμάς 
Κοινωνούς απέδειξας προσκυνούντας 
Την σήν συγκατάβασιν. 





Sometimes the rhythm of a metrical τροπάριον 
depends on quantity; but the τροπάριον is sung 
according to accent; as, 

(To the tune of “Ἔσωσε λαόν.) 
"Εδειξεν ἀστήρ τον πρό ἡλίου Λόγον, 
Ἐλθόντα παύσαι την ἁμαρτίαν, Mayas 
Σαφώς πενιχρόν εἰς σπέος τον συμπαθή 
Ye σπαργάνοις ἑλικτόν, ov γεγηθότες 
Εἰδον tov αὐτόν καὶ βροτὸν και Κύριον. 





It is now admitted by all good scholars, that 
originally the rhythm of the Latin verse depended 
on the accent of each individual word, and not on 
quantity ; and that in process of time the Romans 
adopted the Greek laws of versification. (See 
Munk’s Greek and Roman Metres, pp. 23. 189 -- 
161.) 








PRONUNCIATION. 135 

The Greek grammarians maintain that the acute 
accent has the power of lengthening a short sylla- 
ble, when it stands directly over it; thus, according 
to them, ὄφιν may be a trochee, Aicdov a molossus, 
Avvicos an antispast, ἕως ὁ a spondee. They fur- 
ther assert that both the acute and circumflex have 
the power of lengthening the preceding or follow- 

. . / een συ ΕΚ Ν > I OA 
ing syllable ; thus, In τέρας, ἀπὸ ἔθεν, πρὶν αὖ, οἰκῆας, 
the syllables pas, πο, πριν, as, may be made long. 
If the first of these assertions is based on truth, it 
may be supposed that the rhythm of the Greek 
verse also depended originally on accent, and not 
on quantity, traces of which practice may be dis- 
covered in the Homeric poems. As to the second 
assertion of the Scholiasts, it is strange enough, but 
after all it may not be as absurd as it appears to be. 

B. A. 880. Αὕτη οὖν ἡ ὀξεῖα, ἐπικειμένη τινὶ τῶν βραχέων ἢ τινὶ 
διχρόνωι συστελλομένωι, μηκύνει αὐτήν, ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ ““ Τρῶες δ᾽ ἐρρίγη- 
σαν, ὅπως ἴδον αἰόλον ὄφιν." 

_ Ibid. p. 831, et seq. ἫἪ ὀξεῖα οὖν τοιαύτην ἔχει φύσιν καὶ δύνα- 
μιν ὡς μὴ μόνον ἐπάνω βραχείας μηκύνειν αὐτὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ προκειμένη 
καὶ μετακειμένη δύνασθαι tnt βραχείαι χρόνον χαριεῖσθαι, ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ 
“*H ναύτηισι τέρας ἠὲ στρατωῖ εὐρέϊ λαῶν᾽)- τοῦ γὰρ τέρας H -pas 
συλλαβὴ βραχεῖα οὖσα διὰ τῆς προκειμένης ὀξείας ἐμηκύνθη τῆς ἐπι- 
κειμένης THt τε- συλλαβηϊῖ...... Μετακειμένη δὲ ὡς ““ Αἴσιμα παρει- 
πὼν ὁ δ᾽ ἀπὸ ἔθεν ὥσατο χειρί" - τῆς ἀπὸ βραχείας οὔσης ἡ ὀξεῖα 
τῆς ἔθεν ἐμήκυνεν. 

Eustath. pp. 80.81. Ἕως ὁ ταῦθ᾽ ὥρμαινε... ... Τὸ δὲ Ο κατὰ 
τέσσαρας τρόπους κοινῆς συλλαβῆς ἐκ τοῦ ταπεινώματος τῆς βραχείας 
ἀνίσταται μηκυνόμενον " καὶ γὰρ καὶ δασύνεται καὶ τόνον ἔχει ὀξὺν, κἂν 


ἡ συνέπεια βαρύνηι αὐτό. 
See, also, Id. pp. 399, 46. 629, 37. 900, 10. 1114, 41. 
1647, 28; also, Draco, p. 6, ed. Herm. 


136 PRONUNCIATION. 


§ 65. 


The Greek mode of expressing the sounds made 
by particular animals would be of great use in 
determining the sounds of some of the letters, if 
the following conditions were granted: first, the 
sounds made by the lower animals are articulate ; 
secondly, a given species of animals, in any part of 
the world, at any time, and under any circum- 
stances, make the same sound; and thirdly, all 
men of all nations and under all circumstances 
have but one way of expressing these sounds. 
αὖ αὖ, the barking of a dog; Romaic γάβ γάβ; 
English bow wow. 
βῆ, the bleating of a sheep; Romaic μπάαα, preee, 
μέεε, or βέεε ; English baa. 
βρεκεκεκέξ κοάξ κοάξ, the croaking of frogs; Romaic 
μπακακά; English croak croak. 

κικκαβαῦ, the cry of an owl; Latin tu tu; English 
toowhit toowhoo. 

κοΐ, the squealing of a pig. 

κόκκυ, the cry of a cuckoo ; Romaic κούκκου. 

φνεί, the sneezing sound made by a fowl when it 
has the pip. 

In respect to tone or accent, we cannot help ad- 
mitting, that, on the whole, its place and nature 
are easily determined even in these inarticulate 
sounds ; for tone is independent of articulation. 


uf 


THE END. 











141 DAY ‘USE 
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 


LOAN DEPT. κι 


This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
on the date to which renewed. _ 


Renewed books ate subject to immediate recall. 


> 
it 


ἫΝ hi ᾿ General Library 
ae β ἘΣ ΠΣ ΝΣ ae University of California 
Berkeley 





C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


IL 


052185230 





33778 


i 
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRAR 





st ey Mehec pen ite 


wp ae ney 


ΗΝ ΠΣ ny 

{εἰ ὶ ἀπ λ νην fret 
cai ary ee Le 1 Me 
δ DA. 4 
atin ja ἮΝ ᾿ 


τ 
Ven OPO ἐμ εὐ Aone 
toagtnat hid 


SC A ee Ne att 
eid 
ee i 

Hk 


ΣΙ oe 


4, Fe 
A Can? Inne 
ga 


CRE 
- Ἶ 


valle 


᾿ς atk 
ἡ ἑῷ 


or 


se 
au ag ys 


4 we iG Ran a (ΟΥ̓͂Σ 


ay ἸῸΝ 
πρὸ 


i 
ae 

PAG Δ ΤΣ 
9h CURR 


Gebers 


ae 


ae 


Pin etenili 
iba τάχος (ial 


ΣΥΝ 
SLBA tHe κυ} .ὴ ; 
ea pode a AT 


‘i 
Ayperg 


Ph 
Nei 





he ye i pit Ἢ 


i 
ἀν 6 ὦ" 
Atel ret 


ty ld 
ie mh 
si 
tt 


Hell 
ἡ nitty ὶ 
yt hire * ὴ 
ἀπο ΤῊ ΤῊ 


ΟΝ 
Vie, bet AC 
tel Oem εὐ} 
ΩΝ ΤΉ Ἄν ¢ 
ἀν 


ae gate ιν 
vere lays ὑσὶ Leas avi aga hy st 
γι trai Wah ΟΠ ety ee ᾿ " Ἱ 
yiyari phan! OPAL Ue tht) HOA γι} ies 
teh) iped Hai aye τ" 
ΠΣ ρὲ 7. at 

νεῖ Toke ie 


ὙΜΉΝ {πη} 
4 νεῖν 
rae} ἢ 


J Haines 
Meehan tits 
αν Μὲ» 


ΑΝ 
ὙΠῸ 


rary Pg 


νυ 


ἣν ἜΤ 


ΠΕ) 
Wish 
fete 

tae 


vey iis Matt Φ}) 
ὙΜΉΝ ᾿ 
ἽΝ 


Εἰ νῦσ)ε 
boot at «δι ΠΝ dias 


ΓΝ ΚΗ; 
at dh 
CoM ἜΠΗ 


Dt Hitler ht 


A ol Wey UAB \ ft 


Hs ia Ve, 
ὙΠῸ KLUM RAD CAP) 
{{: Hag in eg, 
fA λυ sfiel a 0 tient 
Ὰ be OA 
ny τῇ HN Ἢ oT ice abel glide. 
(igetvaness ΤΣ ἢ 
f (horas 
ie 
he, δὰ dis marae 


ἤν st 


ΠΡ ΉΤΗΙ ἽΝ y 


iat a τὴ 
ἀν AP 4 


te) 


a 
ὟΝ Ὧν Lite 
ae ey 


br ΜῊΝ rele is op “ἢ 


ΕἾ 4 
iets 


tne ΤᾺ 
) isa 


τ 
WO URL Ὑ 
, rent ΜΡ ἫΝ 


HAT a 
ΠΡ ΩΝ 


tri 
Cra 
ἢ 


ear 


Fh ἘΠῊΝ 
ΒΝ Bie 
ti ἣ 


ἮΝ 

i 4 thse ASD Te Ὺν ones 

d Υ We ἿΝ ' ye 
Le eta 

a au) want ws 
Ki ity ; 


Van 


t 


isi Dh 


ἐγ τον’ δ. ἀπο (aay 


pte hoes : 


Ah et 


ae ΠΝ 
ain ve 


4 Hedy peagy bys ἐὰν 
At 


« bah yay tt 
haa tl 


